Whitsundays Plan of Management 1998

Administered by Department of Climate Change, Energy, the Environment and Water

Legislation au F2006B00704 In force Legislative Instrument

Legislation content

Whitsundays Plan of Management 1998

made under the

Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Act 1975

Compilation No. 4

Compilation date:   1 January 2018

Includes amendments up to: F2017L00932

 

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Whitsundays Plan of Management 1998  that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 January 2018 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Legislation Register (www.legislation.gov.au). The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. For more information on any uncommenced amendments, see the series page on the Legislation Register for the compiled law.

Application, saving and transitional provisions for provisions and amendments

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. For more information on any modifications, see the series page on the Legislation Register for the compiled law.

Self-repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

 

 

 

Foreword

  The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority acknowledges the continuing sea country management and custodianship of the Great Barrier Reef by Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Traditional Owners whose rich cultures, heritage values, enduring connections and shared efforts protect the Great Barrier Reef for future generations.

  The Great Barrier Reef is recognised internationally as a World Heritage Area under the World Heritage Convention, and nationally as having 6 of the 7 matters of national environmental significance listed in the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999. These matters are: World Heritage properties, the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park, National Heritage places, Commonwealth marine areas, listed migratory species and listed threatened species and ecological communities.

  The legislative and planning framework protecting these significant values and managing use within the Planning Area sits primarily in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Act 1975 (the Act). This Plan regulates some matters mentioned in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Zoning Plan 2003 (the Zoning Plan), but does not otherwise affect the Zoning Plan.

  The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority (the Authority) has prepared the Whitsundays Plan of Management 1998 (the Plan) to protect and conserve the values of the Whitsunday Planning Area (the Planning Area) while allowing for a range of experiences and reasonable opportunities for access and use. The Planning Area includes the marine area around the Whitsunday Island Group and the offshore Hardy Reef Unit within the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park. The Planning Area is geographically described in Schedule 1.

  Traditional Owners have recognised the outstanding value of the Great Barrier Reef since it formed 8,000 to 12,000 years ago. Across the Planning Area, Traditional Owners maintain their connection to land and sea country including the coast on the adjacent mainland, island areas, the Great Barrier Reef and its natural resources. The recorded sightings of Traditional Owners by James Cook in 1770 and the distinct Aboriginal rock art near Nara Inlet enrich Australia’s history and heritage for this unique region.

  The Planning Area makes up 1% of the total area of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park. Recognised as a significant presentation area for Great Barrier Reef world heritage values, it is a showpiece tourism destination for Queensland. Receiving more than 40% of all visitors who travel to the Great Barrier Reef, over 1,000,000 tourists visited the Planning Area in 2016.

  Visitors are attracted by the spectacular scenery of the numerous islands (most of which are Statemanaged national parks), fringing inshore reefs and offshore reefs. The reefs and islands support a diverse range of animal and plant life. These include protected species such as humpback whales, marine turtles, beach stonecurlews and Proserpine rockwallabies. The Planning Area and its adjacent islands hold prerecorded history of traditional use by Traditional Owners as well as sites of importance in the history of European presence, including several historically significant shipwrecks.

  Tourism and recreation are the major uses of the Planning Area. The Whitsundays tourism industry supports a broad range of operation types with most visitors travelling on crewed vessels including day trips and overnight sailing operations. Other tourism use includes bareboats (uncrewed), scenic aircraft flights and cruise ships. The area is very popular for recreational sailing, snorkelling, fishing and accessing adjacent islands. An indication of its popularity is the continuing growth in recreational vessel registrations for the adjacent coastal communities. The area is also used for commercial fishing, research, education and traditional uses.

  The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park and particularly the Planning Area is facing increased pressures which can impact on the resilience of the ecosystems and the services and values they provide to the community. One of the key objectives of the Plan is to balance the protection of a wide range of significant values with ongoing ecologically sustainable use by multiple users. The Plan is intended to reduce or eliminate threats to the values of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park, including the following values:

 (a) nature conservation values;

 (b) cultural and heritage values;

 (c) community (including scientific) values.

  Part 1 of the Plan outlines the values, issues and management strategies. Part 2 contains the enforcement provisions to enact key strategies. These are considered within the context of managing the entire Great Barrier Reef Marine Park.

  Effective management is achieved through review of the Plan in response to new information and changing uses. To date, the Plan has been amended in 1999, 2002, 2005, 2008 and 2017. The key considerations in the 2017 amendments are:

 (a) updating the Part 1 provisions to better align with current strategic management; and

 (b) increasing flexibility of access for user groups, particularly superyachts (more than 35 metres to less than 70 metres in overall length) and motorised water sport users, while maintaining a range of experiences for all visitors (i.e. remote to developed); and

 (c) expanding regular seaplane landing areas to address practicality concerns for takeoff and landings and increased opportunities for daily scenic flights; and

 (d) ceasing reef walking as a permitted activity.

  The Authority will continue to make amendments to the Plan as required, subject to statutory requirements.

  Successful management is achieved through ongoing partnerships. Traditional Owners, all levels of government (particularly the Joint Field Management Program arrangements with the Queensland Parks and Wildlife Service), the tourism industry, other industries and the local community all contribute to the continued recognition and management of the Planning Area. To ensure use of the Planning Area can occur without threatening the values of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park, the Authority encourages the Plan to be complemented by widespread use of responsible reef practices and cooperative working arrangements.

Contents

Foreword 

Part 1—Management of the Whitsunday Planning Area

Division 1—Preliminary

1.1 Name of this Plan

1.2 Application of this Plan

1.3 Intent of this Plan

1.4 Interpretation

Division 2—Overview of values of the Planning Area

1.5 Overview

Division 2A—Nature conservation values

Subdivision 1—Overview of nature conservation values

1.6 Overview

Subdivision 2—Water Quality

1.7A Values

1.7B Issues

1.7C Strategies

Subdivision 3—Corals and associated biota

1.8A Values

1.8B Issues

1.8C Strategies

Subdivision 4—Seagrass meadows, dugong and marine turtles

1.9A Values

1.9B Issues

1.9C Strategies

Subdivision 5—Whales and dolphins

1.10A Values

1.10B Issues

1.10C Strategies

Subdivision 6—Birds

1.11A Values

1.11B Issues

1.11C Strategies

Division 2B—Cultural and heritage values

Subdivision 1—Overview of cultural and heritage values

1.12 Overview

Subdivision 2—Traditional Owner cultural heritage

1.13A Values

1.13B Issues

1.13C Strategies

Subdivision 3—Historic heritage

1.14A Values

1.14B Issues

1.14C Strategies

Subdivision 4—World Heritage and National Heritage

1.15A Values

1.15B Issues

1.15C Strategies

Subdivision 5—Scenic amenity including aesthetics

1.16A Values

1.16B Issues

1.16C Strategies

Division 2C—Community values (including scientific values)

1.17A Overview

1.17B Issues

1.17C Strategies

Division 3—Monitoring the effectiveness of management

1.18 Reef 2050 Integrated Monitoring and Reporting Program Strategy

Division 4—Use of the Planning Area

Subdivision 1—Overview

1.21 Values

1.22 Issues

1.23 Strategies

Subdivision 2—Sensitive sites

1.24 Setting 5 (protected) areas

1.24A Significant bird sites

1.25 Site plans

Subdivision 3—Moorings and tourist facilities

1.26 Policy overview—moorings and tourist facilities

1.27 New permissions for private moorings

1.28 Limit on tourist facilities (other than moorings)

Subdivision 4—Limits on activities

1.29 Aerobatics, motorised water sports and highspeed vessels

1.30 No permissions for reef walking

Subdivision 5—Management of tourist programs

1.31 General

1.32 Types of tourism operations—access rights and operational requirements

1.33 Bookings

1.34 Permissions for tourism operations—policy overview

1.35 Tourism permissions that are capped

1.36 Granting new permissions for regional tour operations

1.37 Fishing or collecting as part of a tourist program

1.39 Harvest fishing and aquaculture operations

1.40 Permission replication and splitting

1.41 Conversion between bareboat and crewed vessel (regional tour operation) operations

1.42 Conversion between tourism operations

1.43 Further permissions

1.44 Special tourism permissions for which only certain persons may apply

Part 2—Enforcement provisions

Division 1—Preliminary

2.1 How many people on a vessel

2.3 When this Part does not apply

2.3A Permissions must be consistent with this Plan

2.3B Permissions for conduct with no or low adverse impact on values of Planning Area

Division 2—General restrictions on the operation of vessels and aircraft

2.4 Vessels not to be operated in certain setting areas

2.5 Operation of tourism operations in the Planning Area

2.5A Passenger transport operations

2.5B Support service operations

2.7 Limits on operation of aircraft

2.8 Other limits on use of vessels

Division 3—Wildlife protection

2.11 Activities in or near significant bird sites

2.12 Protecting coral

Division 4—Other activities

2.14 Certain commercial activities

Schedule 1—The Planning Area

Part 1—Geographic description of area

1. Area 1—Gloucester, Molle, Whitsunday, Repulse and Lindeman Units

2. Area 2 – Hardy Unit

Part 2—Map of area

Schedule 2—Setting areas

Part 1—Setting 1 (intensive) areas

1 Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

2 Dingo Beach setting 1 (intensive) area

3 Earlando Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

4 East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

5 Hamilton Island and Dent Passage setting 1 (intensive) area

6 Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

7 Hayman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

8 Hook Island Observatory and Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

9 Lindeman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

10 Paradise Bay Resort, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

Part 2—Setting 2 (high use) areas

11 Black Island setting 2 (high use) area

12 Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands setting 2 (high use) area

13 Hardy, Hook and Line Reefs setting 2 (high use) area

14 Southern Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area

15 Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area

Part 3—Setting 3 (moderate use) areas

16 Bluff Point setting 3 (moderate use) area

17 Cateran Bay, Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

18 Clarke’s Cove setting 3 (moderate use) area

19 Eastern Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

20 Hook, Line and Barb Reefs Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area

21 Kennedy Sound, Lindeman, Seaforth and Shaw Islands setting 3 (moderate use) area

22 Langford/Black Islands Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area

23 Line Reef setting 3 (moderate use) area

24 Mackerel Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

25 Molle Channel setting 3 (moderate use) area

26 North Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

27 Pandanus Bay, Long Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

28 Roberta Bay, Shaw Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

29 Saba Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

30 South Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

31 South Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

32 Southeastern Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

33 Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

34 Woodwark Bay setting 3 (moderate use) area

Part 4—Setting 4 (low use) areas

35 Armit Island setting 4 (low use) area

36 Border and Deloraine Islands Complex setting 4 (low use) area

37 Burning Point and Shaw island setting 4 (low use) area

38 Double Cone Island setting 4 (low use) area

39 East Hayman and North West Hook Islands setting 4 (low use) area

40 East Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area

41 East Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

42 Eshelby Island setting 4 (low use) area

43 Gloucester Island and Manta Ray Island setting 4 (low use) area

44 Grassy Island, Double Bay and Grimston Point setting 4 (low use) area

45 Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

46 Harold and Edward Islands setting 4 (low use) area

47 Haslewood Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area

48 Lady Island setting 4 (low use) area

49 Lindeman Island complex setting 4 (low use) area

50 Long Island setting 4 (low use) area

51 Middle Island setting 4 (low use) area

52 North Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area

53 Petrel Islet setting 4 (low use) area

54 Puritan Bay, Round Head, Genesta Bay, Cape Conway, Defiance Island setting 4 (low use) area

55 Rattray Island setting 4 (low use) area

56 Repulse Islands setting 4 (low use) area

57 Saddleback, Olden and Gumbrel Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area

58 South Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area

59 Southwest Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area

60 West Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

Part 5—Setting 5 (protected) areas

61 Cow and Calf Islands setting 5 (protected) area

62 Deloraine Island setting 5 (protected) area

63 Double Bay East setting 5 (protected) area

64 Eshelby Islands setting 5 (protected) area

65 Haslewood and Lupton Islands setting 5 (protected) area

66 Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 5 (protected) area

Schedule 3—Locations

1 Almora Islet Location

2 Anchorage Bay, Shaw Island Location

3 Andersons/Woodcutter Bays Location

4 Anne Island Location

5 Apostle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

6 Armit Island Location

7 Armit Islets (No 1) Location

8 Bait Reef Location

9 Bauer Bay, South Molle Island Location

10 Baynham Island Location

11 Beach 25, Whitsunday Island Location

12 Billbob Bay, Shaw Island Location

13 Bird Island Location

14 Black Island Location

15 Blue Pearl Bay, Hayman Island Location

16 Bluff Bay Location

17 Boat Port, Lindeman Island Location

18 Border Island Location

19 Brush Island Location

20 Butterfly Bay/Maureen’s Cove, Hook Island Location

21 Calf Island Location

22 Cane Cocky’s Cove Location

23 Cape Rock Location

24 Catseye Bay, Hamilton Island Location

25 Chance Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

26 Chrome Rock Location

27 Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location

28 Coconut Bay, Lindeman Island Location

29 Cole Island Location

30 Comston Island Location

31 Cow Island Location

32 Daydream Island Location

33 Defiance Island Location

34 Defiance Reefs Location

35 Deloraine Island Location

36 Denman Island Location

37 Dent Island West Location

38 Dent Passage, Dent and Hamilton Islands Location

39 Dingo Beach Location

40 Double Bay East Location

41 Double Bay West Location

42 Double Cone Island Location

43 Double Rocks Location

44 Driftwood Bay, Hamilton Island Location

45 Dugong Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

46 Dumbell Island Location

47 Dungurra Island Location

48 Earlando Coast Location

49 East Repulse Island Location

50 East Rock Location

51 Edward Island Location

52 Edwin Rock Location

53 Eshelby Islands Location

54 Esk Island Location

55 Fairlight Rock Location

56 Fish and Palm Bays, Long Island Location

57 Fitzalan Island Location

58 Fitzalan Passage, Whitsunday Island Location

59 Funnel Bay Location

60 Gap Beach, Lindeman Island Location

61 Genesta Bay Location

62 Gloucester Island Location

63 Grassy Island Location

64 Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

65 Gumbrell Island Location

66 Hamilton Island East Location

67 Happy Bay, Long Island Location

68 Hardy Reef Location

69 Harold Island Location

70 Haslewood Island South Location

71 Hayman Island East Location

72 Hayman Island Resort Location

73 Henning Island Location

74 Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

75 Homestead Bay, Cid Island Location

76 Hook Island Reef (No 1) Location

77 Hook Island Reef (No 2) Location

78 Hook Island Reef (No 5) Location

79 Hook Reef Location

80 Hunt Channel, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location

81 Ireby Island Location

82 Jester Rock Location

83 Keyser Island Location

84 Lagoon Rock Location

85 Langford Island/Spit Location

86 Lindeman Island East Location

87 Line Reef Location

88 Little Grassy Island Location

89 Little Lindeman Island Location

90 Long Island Reef (No 6/No 7) Location

91 Long Rock Location

92 Low Island Location

93 Low Rock Location

94 Luncheon, Manta Ray and Pinnacle Bays, Hook Island Location

95 Lupton Island East Location

96 Mackerel Bay, Hook Island Location

97 Macona Inlet, Hook Island Location

98 Maher Island East Location

99 Maher Island West Location

100 Mansell Island Location

101 Martin Islet, Haslewood Island Location

102 May’s Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

103 Mid Molle Island Location

104 Middle Island Location

105 Moon Island Location

106 Nara Inlet, Hook Island Location

107 Neck Bay East, Shaw Island Location

108 Neck Bay West, Shaw Island Location

109 Nellie Bay Location

110 Nicolson Island Location

111 North Molle Island Location

112 North Repulse Island Location

113 Olden Island Location

114 Pandanus Bay, Long and Pelican Islands Location

115 Paradise Bay, Long Island Location

116 Pentecost Island Location

117 Perseverance Island Location

118 Peter Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

119 Peter Head East, Whitsunday Island Location

120 Petrel Islet Location

121 Pig Bay, Haslewood Island Location

122 Pine Island Location

123 Pioneer Rocks Location

124 Plantation Bay, Lindeman Island Location

125 Planton Island Location

126 Puritan Bay Location

127 Queen Margrethe Bay, Shaw Island Location

128 Rattray Island Location

129 Repair Island Location

130 Repulse Bay East Location

131 Ripple Rocks Location

132 Roberta Bay, Shaw Island Location

133 Rooper Inlet Location

134 Saba Bay, Hook Island Location

135 Saddleback Island Location

136 Sandy Bay, Long Island Location

137 Sawmill Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

138 Seaforth Island Location

139 Shaw Island Reef (No 5) Location

140 Shaw Island Reef (No 6) Location

141 Shoal Bay Location

142 Shute Harbour Location

143 Shute Island Location

144 Sidney Island Location

145 Sillago Island Location

146 Sinker Reef Location

147 South Molle Island East Location

148 South Molle Island West Location

149 South Repulse Island Location

150 Spitfire Rock Location

151 St Helen Rock Location

152 Steen’s Beach, Hook Island Location

153 Stockyard Beach, Haslewood Island Location

154 Stonehaven Anchorage, Hook Island Location

155 Surprise Rock Location

156 Swamp Bay Location

157 Tancred Island Location

158 Teague Island Location

159 Thomas Island Location

160 Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

161 Trammel Bay Location

162 Triangle Island Location

163 Turtle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

164 Unnamed Island (20059) Location

165 Unnamed Island (20023), Armit Islets (No 1) Location

166 Unnamed Reef (20025a/b, 20622) Location

167 Unnamed Reef (20628) Location

168 Volskow Island Location

169 White Bay, Haslewood and Lupton Islands Location

170 White Rock Location

171 Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island Location

172 Whitsunday Island Reef (No 1/No 18), Whitsunday Island Location

173 Whitsunday Island Reef (No 5), Whitsunday Island Location

174 Whitsunday Island Reef (No 16/No 17), Whitsunday Island Location

175 Whitsunday Island Reef (No 19/No 20), Whitsunday Island Location

176 Windy Bay, Haslewood Island Location

177 Wirrainbeia Island Location

178 Woodwark Bay North Location

179 Woodwark Bay South Location

180 Workington Island Location

181 Yellow Rock Location

182 Yvonne’s Coves, Whitsunday Island Location

Schedule 4—Designated motorised water sports areas

1 Hayman Island and Arkhurst Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

2 North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

3 Fitzalan Passage designated motorised water sports area

Schedule 6—Significant bird sites

1 Bird Island significant bird site

2 East Rock significant bird site

3 Edwin Rock significant bird site

4 Eshelby Islands significant bird site

5 Armit Island (southern beach only) significant bird site

6 Double Cone Island (western island only) significant bird site

7 Grassy Island (southern beach only) significant bird site

8 Armit Islets (No 1) significant bird site

9 Olden Rock (south of Olden Island) significant bird site

10 Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point) significant bird site

11 South Repulse Island (western beach only) significant bird site

Schedule 7—Regular aircraft landing areas

1 Hardy Reef regular aircraft landing area

2 Bait Reef regular aircraft landing area

3 Daydream Island regular aircraft landing area

4 Bauer Bay and Mid Molle Island regular aircraft landing area

5 Cid Harbour, Sawmill Bay, Hunt Channel and Dugong Inlet regular aircraft landing area

6 Whitehaven Beach regular aircraft landing area

7 Chance Bay and Moon Island regular aircraft landing area

8 Happy Bay and Fish and Palm Bays regular aircraft landing area

9 Dent Passage and Dent and Hamilton Islands regular aircraft landing area

10 Plantation Bay and Seaforth Island regular aircraft landing area

11 Hayman, Langford and Black Islands regular aircraft landing area

Schedule 9—Definitions

Endnotes

Endnote 1—About the endnotes

Endnote 2—Abbreviation key

Endnote 3—Legislation history

Endnote 4—Amendment history

Part 1—Management of the Whitsunday Planning Area

Division 1—Preliminary

1.1  Name of this Plan

  This Plan is the Whitsundays Plan of Management 1998.

1.2  Application of this Plan

  This Plan applies to the area of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park (the Marine Park) inside the Whitsunday Planning Area (the Planning Area).

1.3  Intent of this Plan

 (1) The intent of this Plan, in conjunction with other management mechanisms, is to protect and conserve identified values, and world heritage values, of the Marine Park and Planning Area, while allowing for reasonable opportunities to access and use the Planning Area having regard to the precautionary principle.

Note 1: For world heritage values, see section 528 of the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (which is relevant because of subsection 3(1A) of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Act 1975 and subsection 13(1) of the Legislation Act 2003).

Note 2: For precautionary principle, see subsection 3(1) of the Act (which is relevant because of subsection 13(1) of the Legislation Act 2003).

 (2) Section 39Y of the Act sets out the following objects of plans of management:

 (a) to ensure, for particular areas of the Marine Park in which the Authority considers that nature conservation values, cultural and heritage values, or scientific values, are, or may be, threatened, that appropriate proposals are developed to reduce or eliminate the threats;

 (b) to ensure management for the recovery and continued protection and conservation of species and ecological communities that are, or may become:

 (i) extinct; or

 (ii) extinct in the wild; or

 (iii) critically endangered; or

 (iv) endangered; or

 (v) vulnerable; or

 (vi) conservation dependent;

 (c) to ensure that activities within areas of the Marine Park are managed on the basis of ecologically sustainable use;

 (d) to provide a basis for managing the uses of a particular area of the Marine Park that may conflict with other uses of the area or with the values of the area;

 (e) to provide for the management of areas of the Marine Park in conjunction with community groups in circumstances where those groups have a special interest in the areas concerned;

 (f) to enable people using the Marine Park to participate in a range of recreational activities.

 (4) The Authority does not intend that this Plan will impair or extinguish any native title rights in the Planning Area.

1.4  Interpretation

 (1) Unless the contrary intention appears, a term defined in Schedule 9 has the meaning given by that schedule.

 (2) A reference in this Plan to a reef or other place, followed by an identification number (for example, “Bird Island 20019a”), is a reference to the reef or place depicted and numbered in:

 (a) the map titled MPZ10—Whitsundays, published by the Authority in April 2011; or

 (b) the map titled Special Edition—Whitsunday Group, published by the Authority in September 2011.

 (3) There are discrete boundaries for Locations described in Schedule 3.

 (5) If part of the boundary of a Location extends beyond the Planning Area, the Location boundary is taken to be the boundary of the Planning Area.

 (6) In this Plan, all geographic coordinates are expressed in terms of the Geocentric Datum of Australia 1994 (GDA94), published in Gazette No GN 35 of 6 September 1995.

Note 1: The intertidal areas and most of the islands are managed by the Queensland Government.

Note 2: The Commonwealth island of Eshelby Island 20012 and the southern part of Dent Island 20058c, and their intertidal areas, are managed by the Authority.

Division 2—Overview of values of the Planning Area

1.5  Overview

 (1) For the purposes of the Plan, the values of the Planning Area have been grouped into 3 categories:

 (a) nature conservation; and

 (b) cultural and heritage; and

 (c) community (including scientific).

Note: Although the values have been grouped into 3 categories, it is noted that the values are interrelated and overlap. Values constantly evolve over time and are not static. Values (a) and (b) align with the objects of plans of management within the Act and value (c) has been incorporated and termed community values consistent with a broader range of objectives in the plan of management and the Act.

 (2) This Division and Divisions 2A, 2B and 2C outline the values and associated issues specific to the Planning Area, as well as the management strategies to address them to ensure ecologically sustainable use.

 (3) Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Traditional Owners have continuing connections to traditional clan estates which are areas of great importance historically, culturally, socially and economically. This connection has been maintained despite a dynamic environmental shift during the last significant sea level rise (between 12,000 and 8,000 years ago), an altered state of living since European occupation and the modern use of marine and coastal environments. The Authority recognises that as custodians Traditional Owners have unique responsibilities, shared conservation interests and contrasting perspectives for some of the values and uses in the Planning Area.

 (4) Climate change, landbased runoff, coastal development and some remaining impacts from fishing present threats to the Planning Area at a broader scale. Strategies for managing these threats are presented in the Reef 2050 LongTerm Sustainability Plan (the Reef 2050 Plan).

 (5) Increased visitation from vessels that have travelled internationally also presents the potential for increased biosecurity risks. Australia’s National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest Incursions (including the Biosecurity Act 2015) aims to prevent new marine pests arriving, guide responses when a new pest does arrive and minimise the spread and impact of pests already established in Australia.

 (6) The Planning Area is a complex natural system with multiple uses that is subject to successive and combined impacts on the environment (direct harm to marine life, reduced water quality and scenic amenity). This can also lead to adverse impacts on reefdependent enterprises. Managing the cumulative impacts presents a challenge requiring a strategic approach with practical decisionsupport tools and methods together with supporting policy mechanisms (relating to offsets and net benefits) and stewardship.

Note: The Reef 2050 Plan’s Draft Cumulative Impact Management Policy, Draft Net Benefit Policy and Draft Offset Guideline for the Great Barrier Reef provide a systematic and consistent approach to achieve overall net benefit to the Great Barrier Reef.

Division 2A—Nature conservation values

Subdivision 1—Overview of nature conservation values

1.6  Overview

 (1) Nature conservation values of the Planning Area that the Authority considers are, or may be, threatened include the following:

 (a) water quality;

 (b) corals and associated biota;

 (c) habitats and marine animals;

 (d) birds nesting or roosting in, or adjacent to, the Planning Area.

 (2) To reduce or eliminate the threats to nature conservation values in the Planning Area, areas of unique or outstanding value have been assigned high levels of protection and, in some cases, access is limited in some areas.

Subdivision 2—Water Quality

1.7A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to water quality in the Planning Area.

 (2) Water in the Planning Area has long been a natural resource of significance to Traditional Owners, their spirituality and their physical health. From prehistoric to contemporary times saltwater areas and freshwater sites are regarded for their diversity in use and value. This includes language and place names, songlines, storylines, intimate traditional ecological knowledge, social enjoyment, historic travel and trade routes, access and use of coastal fishing places, fish traps, hunting grounds and traditional estates.

 (3) Good water quality is essential for the optimal functioning and resilience of the ecological systems and the marine life they support.

 (4) The clarity of water has supported the growth of a substantial tourism industry. Reef dependent industries receive direct economic benefits from a healthy reef ecosystem that is dependent upon good water quality.

 (5) Water clarity is important for the enjoyment of, and satisfaction with, the environment. It is also important for safety, particularly diver safety.

1.7B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to water quality in the Planning Area.

 (2) Changes to water quality may affect the cultural and spiritual values held by Traditional Owners, the way they interact with water and how they use the natural resources that depend on it.

 (3) Reduced water quality impacts on the condition of physical, chemical and ecological processes.

 (4) Reduced underwater visibility can adversely impact on tourism operators and visitor experience.

 (5) Broadly, factors adversely impacting on the water quality are as follows:

 (a) landbased runoff;

 (b) extreme weather events;

 (c) coastal development;

 (d) direct use from activities including the following:

 (i) tourism;

 (ii) use of ports;

 (iii) shipping;

 (iv) fishing;

 (v) agricultural activities;

 (vi) development.

 (6) The Proserpine River directly influences water quality in the Planning Area. Nearby O’Connell, Pioneer, Plane, Burdekin and Fitzroy rivers also influence the water quality in the Planning Area. Potential sources of pollution from these river catchments include sediment, agricultural chemicals and fertilisers, discharge of treated sewage, marine debris and other chemicals including antifouling paint and fuel residues.

 (7) There are potential impacts to marine life from the Planning Area’s complex hydrodynamics which can cause settled sediments to resuspend.

 (8) The exchange of ballast water has the potential to impact on water quality.

Note 1: The acceptable area for ballast water exchange is 12 nautical miles from the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef under the International Convention for the Control and Management of Ballast Water and Sediments.

Note 2: Further information on ballast water exchange is available in the Australian Ballast Water Management Requirements Version 6 available at www.agriculture.gov.au.

1.7C  Strategies

 (1) Work in partnership with Traditional Owner groups whose sea country includes the Planning Area to formalise their aspirations for sea country relating to water quality.

 (2) Encourage investigation of the complex hydrodynamics in the Planning Area including the retention and resuspension of turbid water.

 (3) Encourage investigation into the impacts of anchoring including chain swing at highuse sites within and adjacent to the Planning Area.

 (4) Encourage investigation of the effectiveness of current marine monitoring sites within the Planning Area.

 (5) Monitor the water quality parameters identified in the Water Quality Guidelines for the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park and promptly respond where trigger values are exceeded.

Note: The Water Quality Guidelines for the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park are available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (6) Monitor and improve management practices and the quality of water entering the Planning Area, and the Marine Park, under the Reef Water Quality Protection Plan 2013 through partnerships with the Commonwealth and Queensland governments, the Regional Natural Resource Management body and agricultural industries as part of the commitment.

 (7) Apply the Dredging and Dredge Spoil Material Disposal Policy for the management of dredging and disposal of dredge spoil material in the Marine Park.

Note: The Dredging and Dredge Spoil Material Disposal Policy is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (8) Encourage education and community awareness, stewardship and best practice for protecting or improving water quality through partnerships with the Commonwealth, Queensland and local governments, land holders and industry groups.

 (9) Encourage vessel operators to obtain uptodate management guidance and comply with inspection requirements to prevent and manage incursions from marine pests in Australia prior to entering the Planning Area.

Note:  Information on Australia’s National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest Incursions is available at www.agriculture.gov.au.

 (10) Encourage the management of vessels and movable structures within the Planning Area in a manner that avoids the accumulation of biofouling.

Note:  Information on the National biofouling management guidelines and the Antifouling and inwater cleaning guidelines is available at www.agriculture.gov.au.

Subdivision 3—Corals and associated biota

1.8A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to corals and associated biota in the Planning Area.

 (2) Corals and associated biota are of great cultural, spiritual and social importance especially to Traditional Owners.

 (3) The relatively clear waters of the northern part of the Planning Area have allowed for the growth and development of extensive and diverse reef structures and corals that are uncommon on fringing reefs.

 (4) Coral reefs vary considerably from fragile hard and soft coral communities to speciespoor muddy reefs. The reefs significant for larval dispersal include but are not limited to those adjacent to Harold, Haslewood, Lindeman and Shaw Islands.

 (5) A previously undescribed coral species (Goniastrea sp.) has been recorded at Double Bay, and a species of sponge (Rhabderemia sorokinae) has been recorded at Deloraine Island reef. They are believed to have a limited geographic distribution.

1.8B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to corals and associated biota in the Planning Area.

 (2) Fringing reefs around islands are limited throughout the Marine Park and are well represented in the Planning Area.

 (3) The accessibility of fringing reefs make them vulnerable to degradation from excessive human use, including but not limited to anchoring, fin damage from diving and snorkelling, reef walking and collecting.

 (4) The slower rate of coral recovery following natural disasters suggests recruitment and recovery from any future disaster may be reduced or take a long time.

 (5) Coral and associated biota health is diminished with poor water quality influenced by landbased runoff, coastal development and intensified adjacent marine traffic.

 (6) Outbreaks and high densities of the native predatory crownofthorns starfish and Drupella marine snails can cause significant coral damage and have a negative impact on the ecological composition of species representation.

 (7) Coral and associated biota health has been affected by coral bleaching in the past and this is predicted to increase in the future.

 (8) Coral disease is being increasingly observed and is predicted to increase in the future.

1.8C  Strategies

 (1) Work in partnership with Traditional Owner groups whose sea country includes the Planning Area to formalise their aspirations for sea country relating to coral and associated biota.

 (2) Identify and prioritise coral reefs when determining management responses.

 (3) Monitor the health and resilience of corals and associated biota and modify and/or implement management measures as required.

 (4) Cease the activity of reef walking as part of a permitted activity.

 (5) Continue to establish noanchoring areas at sites susceptible to anchor damage and where possible delineate the boundaries of these areas with reef protection markers (see subclause 2.12(3)).

Note: Noanchoring area locations are detailed in the Regulations.

 (6) Continue to provide public moorings where appropriate.

Note: Locations of public moorings are available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (7) Anchor with due care to avoid damaging coral and to use moorings when and where they are available.

Note 1: Private moorings can be used with prior agreement of the owner. Location and permittee details of private moorings are available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Note 2: Information about responsible reef practices for anchoring and mooring is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (8) Prohibit a person from damaging coral in the Planning Area (see clause 2.12).

 (9) Restrict large vessels and large ships to specific anchorage areas (see clause 2.4).

 (10) Cap the number of relevant permissions for tourism operations that can anchor daily in the Planning Area.

 (11) Manage and limit areas for highspeed vessels and motorised water sport to minimise potential impacts with coral reef (see subclauses 2.8(1) to (4)).

 (12) Discourage drifting of vessels to avoid potential impacts with coral reefs.

 (13) Continue to have harvest fisheries and aquaculture operations occur outside the Planning Area.

 (14) Encourage tourism operations to apply for permissions to assist with controlling outbreaks of predatory marine species such as the crownofthorns starfish and Drupella marine snails.

 (15) Provide guidance about dredging coral reef habitat to persons who are operating a facility or carrying out works for the development of marine infrastructure.

Note: The policy Dredging coral reef habitat operating a facility or carrying out works for the development of marine infrastructure is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (16) Require a relevant permission for the taking of coral under the Zoning Plan.

Note: Taking coral (including damaging or collecting coral) requires a relevant permission under the Zoning Plan. See the definition of taking in the Zoning Plan available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Subdivision 4—Seagrass meadows, dugong and marine turtles

1.9A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values in relation to seagrass meadows, dugong and marine turtles in the Planning Area.

 (2) Dugong, marine turtles, their habitats and lifecycles are of significant cultural, spiritual and social importance, especially to Traditional Owners.

 (3) The Planning Area includes seagrass meadows at Repulse Bay, bays surrounding Whitsunday Island such as Tongue Bay, and mainland coastal bays such as Shoal Bay. Seagrass meadows are important habitats for dugong and green turtles as they provide a critical food source and important nursery habitat for a variety of marine life.

 (4) Several threatened species of marine turtles inhabit the Planning Area.

1.9B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to seagrass meadows, dugong and marine turtles in the Planning Area.

 (2) Seagrass meadows throughout the Marine Park are facing increased pressure from poor water quality, and habitat loss and modification, resulting from increased landbased runoff, coastal development, marine traffic, intensity of extreme weather events, sea surface temperature and sea level rise.

 (3) Dugong and marine turtles are adversely impacted (injury and death) by underwater noise, vessel strike, incidental capture or ingestion of marine debris.

 (4) Marine turtle nesting sites adjacent to the Planning Area are vulnerable to human interference and hatchlings can be impacted by artificial light sources both on land and in the water when trying to access the ocean and navigate away from the beach.

1.9C  Strategies

 (1) Work in partnership with Traditional Owner groups whose sea country includes the Planning Area to formalise their aspirations for sea country relating to seagrass meadows, dugong and marine turtles.

 (2) Enforce the Zoning Plan requirements for taking of protected species.

Note: Section 5.3 of the Zoning Plan refers to the entry to zones for the purpose of taking protected species. See the definition of taking in the Zoning Plan available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (3) Enforce the limits in the Zoning Plan and Regulations on netting and bait netting activities by commercial fishers particularly within the Species Conservation (Dugong Protection) Special Management Areas (Repulse Bay and Edgecumbe Bay).

 (4) Encourage the use of responsible reef practices around dugong and marine turtles.

Note: Information about responsible reef practices around turtles is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (5) Ensure the conditions of a permission for any new private mooring require the mooring to be designed, placed and installed in a way that assists the surrounding habitat and its ecological process to be maintained (see subclause 1.27(6)).

 (6) Continue to provide public moorings where appropriate.

Note: Locations of public moorings are available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (7) Encourage the community to minimise the source and occurrence of marine debris in the Great Barrier Reef through education, cleanup activities and the development of source reduction plans.

 (8) Manage and limit areas for highspeed vessels and motorised water sport to minimise potential impacts with dugong and marine turtles (see subclauses 2.8(1) to (4)).

Subdivision 5—Whales and dolphins

1.10A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to whales and dolphins in the Planning Area.

 (2) Whales and dolphins, and their habits and life cycles, are of significant cultural, spiritual and social importance, especially to Traditional Owners.

 (3) The Planning Area is an important calving ground for humpback whales which migrate north from the Southern Ocean during winter.

 (4) Several species of dolphins inhabit the area, including the protected Australian snubfin dolphin and the Australian humpback dolphin.

1.10B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to whales and dolphins in the Planning Area.

 (2) Whales and dolphins may be disturbed by vessels and aircraft at close range.

 (3) Whales and dolphins are occasionally injured by vessels.

 (4) Ingestion of marine debris and entanglement in fishing nets are threats to whales and dolphins.

1.10C  Strategies

 (1) Work in partnership with Traditional Owner groups whose sea country includes the Planning Area to formalise their aspirations for sea country relating to whales and dolphins.

 (2) Encourage the use of responsible reef practices around whales and dolphins.

Note: Information about responsible reef practices around whales and dolphins is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (3) Protect whales from approaching vessels and aircraft by enforcing the restrictions under the Regulations on the operation of vessels and aircraft near whales, including the restrictions that apply in the Whitsunday Whale Protection Area (which includes most of the Planning Area).

 (4) Manage and limit areas for highspeed vessels and motorised water sport to minimise potential impacts with whales and dolphins (see subclauses 2.8(1) to (4)).

 (5) Encourage the community to minimise the source and occurrence of marine debris in the Great Barrier Reef through education, cleanup activities and the development of source reduction plans.

 (6) Apply the Authority’s operational policy to address the interaction of vessels, aircraft and people, with whales and dolphins.

Note: The Authority’s Operational Policy on Whale and Dolphin Conservation in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Subdivision 6—Birds

1.11A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to birds nesting, feeding or roosting in the Planning Area.

 (2) Birds and their nesting, feeding and roosting areas are of significant cultural, spiritual and social importance, especially to Traditional Owners.

 (3) Many migratory seabirds and shorebirds that visit the Planning Area and adjacent islands are recognised internationally under the JapanAustralia Migratory Bird Agreement (the JAMBA), the ChinaAustralia Migratory Bird Agreement (the CAMBA) and the Republic of Korea—Australia Migratory Bird Agreement (the ROKAMBA).

 (4) The following species are particularly important:

 (a) beach stonecurlew (Esacus magnirostris);

 (b) eastern curlew (Numenius madagascariensis);

 (c) blacknaped tern (Sterna sumatrana);

 (d) bridled tern (Onychoprion anaethetus);

 (e) crested tern (Thalasseus bergii);

 (f) lesser crested tern (Thalasseus bengalensis);

 (g) eastern reef egret (Egretta sacra);

 (h) pied cormorant (Phalacrocorax varius);

 (i) pied imperial pigeon (Ducula bicolor);

 (j) osprey (Pandion haliaetus);

 (k) whitebellied sea eagle (Haliaeetus leucogaster).

 (5) Birds are particularly plentiful from October to March, when thousands of waders and seabirds migrate to the Planning Area to nest.

 (6) There are a number of significant bird sites in the area (see Schedule 6).

1.11B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to birds nesting, roosting, or feeding in the Planning Area.

 (2) Seabirds nesting in colonies and roosting on sand spits, and shorebirds feeding at mudflats, are susceptible to disturbance from human activity.

 (3) Ingestion of, and entanglement by, marine debris are threats to seabirds and shorebirds.

1.11C  Strategies

 (1) Work in partnership with Traditional Owner groups whose sea country includes the Planning Area to formalise their aspirations for sea country relating to birds and their nesting, roosting, and feeding areas in the Planning Area.

 (2) Encourage use of responsible reef practices when visiting islands and observing seabirds.

Note 1: Significant bird sites are identified in Schedule 6 and restrictions on activities at these sites are set out in clause 2.11. These restrictions are consistent with the Guidelines for Managing Visitation to Seabird Breeding Islands available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Note 2: Details of responsible reef practices around bird watching are available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (3) Continue to monitor and develop bird conservation measures within the Planning Area.

 (4) Protect shorebirds and migratory birds within significant bird sites from approaching vessels and aircraft, particularly during vulnerable periods (see clause 2.11 and Schedule 6).

Note: The strategies developed in this Plan support the Wildlife Conservation Plan for Migratory Shorebirds, the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999, the JAMBA, the CAMBA and the ROKAMBA. These can be found at www.environment.gov.au.

 (5) Encourage the community to minimise the source and occurrence of marine debris in the Great Barrier Reef through education, cleanup activities and the development of source reduction plans.

Division 2B—Cultural and heritage values

Subdivision 1—Overview of cultural and heritage values

1.12  Overview

 (1) Heritage values in the Planning Area are the following:

 (a) Traditional Owner cultural heritage;

 (b) historic heritage;

 (c) World Heritage and National Heritage;

 (d) scenic amenity including aesthetics.

 (2) These values may be at risk from activities within and adjacent to the Planning Area. The Authority has prepared a heritage strategy, developed in accordance with the requirements of the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Regulations 2000.

Note: The document published by the Authority and entitled Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Heritage Strategy 2005 is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Subdivision 2—Traditional Owner cultural heritage

1.13A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to Traditional Owner Cultural Heritage in the Planning Area.

 (2) Across the Planning Area cultural heritage values are unique, dynamic, diverse and living as they are valued by Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Traditional Owners. The values are inherited from past generations and by maintaining those cultural heritage values today, the ancient responsibility to manage land and sea areas for future generations continues. Cultural heritage is broad and is expressed through spiritual and cultural affiliations with a site or area and through activities undertaken in accordance with customs and traditions.

 (3) Values include the traditional land and sea country areas, significant places, sacred sites and the resources that Traditional Owners use, value or connect with. This can also include culturally important symbols or objects.

 (4) Areas adjacent to the Planning Area include evidence of the history of Traditional Owner occupation and use of the islands and surrounding waters including a quarry of international significance on South Molle Island, a nationally significant rock art site at Nara Inlet on Hook Island, other rock art sites, middens and stone fish traps.

 (5) The relationship of the Traditional Owners with the marine and natural environment is demonstrated by the continuing practice of customs and traditions across sites or areas significant to them.

 (6) Traditional knowledge is safeguarded by Traditional Owners and transferred and communicated across generations. This includes oral traditions, dreaming stories, spirituality, observations, cultural lore and histories about people and place that continue a way of living or explain the natural world. Language, songlines, stories, music, art, dance and ceremony continue to give value to everyday life. These aspects connect people to a place or time and provide learning and perspective.

 (7) Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander structures, technology, tools and archaeology are familiar features of Traditional Owner cultural heritage.

 (8) Evidence of Traditional Owner occupation, predating the last sea level rise, may be contained in submerged marine sites within the Planning Area.

1.13B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to Traditional Owner cultural heritage values in the Planning Area.

 (2) Adverse effects on sites or areas of high cultural heritage value for Traditional Owners may result from inappropriate use of the Planning Area.

 (3) There is limited understanding from a management perspective of identification of sites with specific cultural heritage significance.

 (4) There is limited implementation of protective measures to prevent degradation at cultural heritage sites.

1.13C  Strategies

 (1) Work in partnership with Traditional Owners to formalise their aspirations for sea country, and ensure that cultural heritage values are identified, respected and appropriately managed.

 (2) Work in partnership with the Queensland Government and assign a high level of protection to areas of significant cultural heritage value and, in some cases, limit access to such sites to ensure they are protected for future generations.

Subdivision 3—Historic heritage

1.14A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to historic heritage values in the Planning Area.

 (2) Historic heritage values relate to the occupation and use of an area since the arrival of European and other migrants. Values include historic shipwrecks, historic voyages, World War II features, structures and other historical sites.

 (3) Varying cultural, social and individual meanings for historic heritage exist. For example, for some users of the Planning Area shipwrecks and light stations generate aesthetic appeal and provide focal points for science, archaeology and recreation; while other users appreciate the ecology, use and knowledge of the area in its natural state.

 (4) Historic shipwrecks in the Planning Area are considered to be of archaeological and scientific significance and are important sites for recreational use.

 (5) At least 20 shipwrecks believed to be within the area are over 75 years old and are protected by the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976.

 (6) The Valetta is the only historic shipwreck that has a known location within close proximity to the Planning Area, located in the intertidal area at Happy Bay, Long Island.

 (7) Dent Island Lightstation is a part of the Planning Area’s scenic appeal and recognised on the Commonwealth Heritage List, providing evidence of the historical development of maritime navigation aids in Australia.

 (8) World War II plane wrecks in the area are likely to retain significant archaeological information about wartime activities (and may include human remains) and can in some circumstances be important sites for recreational use as part of the Planning Area’s aesthetic values.

1.14B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to historic heritage in the Planning Area.

 (2) Places of historic significance in the Planning Area are fragile and irreplaceable.

 (3) There is a lack of knowledge about the location of heritage sites.

 (4) The condition of known historic shipwrecks is poorly understood.

 (5) Historic shipwrecks and World War II sites in the Planning Area are vulnerable to activities in or around the sites such as dredging, pipe and cable laying and marina development.

 (6) Historic sites are under pressure from natural threats (such as cyclones and sediment erosion), vessel anchoring, and pilfering of artefacts.

 (7) Dent Island Lightstation requires ongoing maintenance in order to maintain its historic heritage value.

1.14C  Strategies

 (1) Identify, manage, protect, conserve and communicate to all generations Commonwealth Heritage places and their values.

 (2) Survey proposed development areas to identify heritage sites prior to disturbance.

 (3) Encourage users of the Planning Area to abide by the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976 when approaching shipwrecks.

 (4) Ensure best practice heritage management of the Dent Island Lightstation through cooperative partnership between the Authority and the Australian Maritime Safety Authority, and in accordance with the Dent Island Lightstation Heritage Management Plan.

Note: The Dent Island Lightstation Heritage Management Plan is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (5) Locate and survey places likely to be of historic significance, including through cooperative partnerships with Traditional Owners, relevant agencies, and other interested bodies.

Note: The document published by the Authority and entitled Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Heritage Strategy 2005 is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Subdivision 4—World Heritage and National Heritage

1.15A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to World and National Heritage in the Planning Area.

 (2) The Great Barrier Reef, including the Planning Area, is a World Heritage Area under the World Heritage Convention and was inscribed in 1981 for its outstanding universal value. Outstanding universal value is defined by the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation as “the cultural and/or natural significance which is so exceptional as to transcend national boundaries and are to be of common importance for present and future generations of all humanity”. The Great Barrier Reef World Heritage Area is recognised for its natural beauty and natural phenomena; its representation of major stages in the Earth’s evolutionary history, including man’s interaction with the environment; its ecological and biological processes; and its habitats for the conservation of biodiversity.

 (3) The Great Barrier Reef, including the Planning Area, is also a National Heritage place under the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999.

1.15B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issue relating to World and National Heritage in the Planning Area.

 (2) Influences both within and external to the Planning Area and Great Barrier Reef may adversely impact on the World and National Heritage values.

Note: Risks and threats to the World Heritage Area have been more explicitly addressed in periodic reporting processes for world heritage sites to which the Authority contributes.

1.15C  Strategies

 (1) Protect and present the world heritage values of the Great Barrier Reef World Heritage Area through the Joint Field Management Program under the Great Barrier Reef Intergovernmental Agreement, and in accordance with the Authority’s statutory responsibilities and Australia’s international obligations.

 (2) Manage the Planning Area to contribute to the protection and management of the National and World Heritage by conserving areas of high value and/or good condition and improving degraded areas of high value by limiting use.

 (3) Manage the Planning Area to maintain a range of tourism and recreation experiences, including presentation of the World Heritage Area.

Subdivision 5—Scenic amenity including aesthetics

1.16A  Values

 (1) The Authority has identified the following values relating to scenic amenity in the Planning Area.

 (2) Scenic amenity values include visual elements such as coral reefs, continental islands and water clarity. There is an abundance and diversity of shapes, sizes and colours, spectacular species of reef fish and coral assemblages of hard and soft corals. The islands and inlets showcase white sandy beaches, varied geology, and diverse vegetation and wildlife.

 (3) The aesthetic values of the Great Barrier Reef World Heritage Area contribute to its outstanding universal value and listing as a World Heritage Site under criterion (vii) “contain superlative natural phenomena or areas of exceptional natural beauty and aesthetic importance”. Specifically the World Heritage listing states that “The Whitsunday Islands provide a magnificent vista of green vegetated islands and white sandy beaches spread over azure waters”.

 (4) Traditional Owners have recognised the outstanding value of the Great Barrier Reef since it formed 8,000 to 12,000 years ago. Their place attachment includes natural, cultural and spiritual values for land and sea country that are beneath, in and above the sea. Traditional Owners and their traditional estates are inseparable. Aesthetic practices preserve the traditional ways of seeing and being.

1.16B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to scenic amenity in the Planning Area.

 (2) The combined effects from cyclones, declining water quality, marine debris and increasing sea temperature are impacting on the natural beauty and phenomena of the Great Barrier Reef ecosystem.

 (3) There are over 50 known hot spots for marine debris in the Planning Area.

 (4) The visual and noise impacts from activities such as coastal development, transient shipping, aircraft and large numbers of tourists, all diminish natural scenic values both visually and audibly. Increasing these uses will lead to cumulative adverse impacts on the scenic amenity in the Planning Area.

1.16C  Strategies

 (1) Balance increasing levels of visitation, a range of experiences (from remote to high use), and conflicting use, with impacts to aesthetic values and damage to the environment.

 (2) Provide a range of setting areas ranging from setting 1 (intensive use) to setting 5 (protected). Place limits on vessel length, group sizes, operation of vessels and aircraft, facilities and certain activities which can be undertaken in the Planning Area (see clause 1.23).

 (3) Align and manage interfaces between marine and land uses including their activities, group sizes and facilities.

Note: For example, islandbased campgrounds correspond with a complementary marine setting.

 (4) Manage and limit areas for highspeed vessels and motorised water sport to minimise potential visual and noise impacts (see subclauses 2.8(1) to (4)).

 (5) Maintain minimum flight heights for aircraft and provide areas for daily aircraft landings (see clause 2.7).

 (6) Encourage and undertake the removal of marine debris.

Division 2C—Community values (including scientific values)

1.17A  Overview

 (1) For Traditional Owners, the Planning Area is a place of social commune and economic significance. This includes social enjoyment, social gatherings and community ceremonies during times of mourning. Their protocols for customary practices can include:

 (a) greeting people, which is commonly known as a Traditional Owner welcome to country, or seeking permission to undertake activities; and

 (b) respect for land and sea country, community and elders; and

 (c) genderspecific men’s and women’s business, knowledge and places; and

 (d) historical trade with neighbouring and faraway communities and with Europeans during the early days of contact in Australia.

 (2) The health of the Great Barrier Reef has significant influence on the wellbeing and benefits to individuals, families, businesses and communities within and adjacent to the Planning Area. These include:

 (a) employment and income for Reefdependent industries and communities; and

 (b) scientific research; and

 (c) understanding, appreciation and enjoyment of, personal connection with, health benefits from, access to and traditional use of the Great Barrier Reef.

 (3) Scientific research has made a substantial contribution to the way the Great Barrier Reef is understood, managed and used. Monitoring also plays a key role in tracking trends and effects on values.

 (4) There is continued global interest in protection of the Great Barrier Reef.

 (5) The Whitsunday region contributed to shaping Queensland society through:

 (a) early interactions between Traditional Owners and explorers; and

 (b) journeys of early explorers; and

 (c) the experiences of hardship and survival, such as those of shipwreck survivors; and

 (d) the innovations and enterprise of early tourism operators.

 (6) The Planning Area receives the most concentrated level of tourism across the Great Barrier Reef and is a significant contributor to the Australian economy. The Whitsunday tourism industry presents the World Heritage Area to these visitors.

1.17B  Issues

 (1) The Authority has identified the following issues relating to scientific, social and economic values in the Planning Area.

 (2) Community benefits can be difficult to balance and allocate as they are often unique to an individual’s experience and background.

 (3) Further quantification of the broader and ongoing community benefits is required.

 (4) Drivers such as economic growth, population growth and new technologies may influence the use of the Planning Area and adjacent land, potentially restricting patterns of use, access and enjoyment of the area.

 (5) Congestion of tourism activities through the activation of latent permits during peak periods and noncompliance with legislation can contribute to impacts on scenic amenity and overall environmental values.

 (6) Further understanding and assessment are required of the consequential and cumulative impacts on community benefits as a result of activities within and adjacent to the Great Barrier Reef.

 (7) Noise and light pollution from sources on land and in the water can impact on community benefit values.

1.17C  Strategies

 (1) Manage the Planning Area as a multipleuse marine protected area, providing for protection, allowing for ecologically sustainable use, promoting understanding and enjoyment, and encouraging engagement.

 (2) Balance increasing levels of visitation, a range of experiences (from remote to high use), and conflicting use, with impacts to aesthetic values and damage to the environment.

 (3) Provide a range of setting areas ranging from setting 1 (intensive use) to setting 5 (protected). Place limits on vessel length, group sizes, operation of vessels and aircraft, facilities and certain activities which can be undertaken in the Planning Area (see clause 1.23).

Note: Settings in the Planning Area extend generally 1,500 metres from the reef edge.

 (4) Align and manage interfaces between marine and land uses including their activities, group sizes and facilities.

Note: For example, islandbased campgrounds correspond with a complementary marine setting.

 (5) Manage the number and type of tourist programs accessing the Planning Area on a daily and nondaily basis (see clause 1.32).

 (6) Encourage highstandard tourism operations in the Planning Area.

 (7) Provide for the continued recreational use of the Planning Area.

Note: The Authority’s policy on Recreation Management Strategy for the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (8) Manage and limit areas for highspeed vessels and motorised water sport to minimise conflict with other users in the Planning Area (see subclauses 2.8(1) to (4)).

 (9) Work in partnership with Traditional Owner groups, tourism operators, industry groups, researchers, conservation groups and recreational users, as well as Commonwealth, Queensland and local governments, to collaboratively manage the Planning Area.

 (10) Provide for continued scientific research and monitoring in the Planning Area.

Note: The Authority’s Policy on Managing Scientific Research in the Great Barrier Marine Park and Environmental Impact Management Policy are available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (11) Engage stakeholders through the Authority’s Reef Advisory Committees and Local Marine Advisory Committees as well as the wider public to enable managers to gain a better understanding of community values and issues of concern.

 (12) Encourage volunteer programs, such as components of the marine monitoring program and avenues for community involvement such as the Authority’s Eye on the Reef and Reef Guardian programs.

Note: Further information on the Authority’s Eye on the Reef and Reef Guardian programs is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (13) Encourage the development and implementation of a framework, including guidelines and benchmarks, for social and economic impact assessments for the Planning Area.

Division 3—Monitoring the effectiveness of management

1.18  Reef 2050 Integrated Monitoring and Reporting Program Strategy

 (1) The Reef 2050 Integrated Monitoring and Reporting Program Strategy (the Program) is being implemented to monitor the success of the Reef 2050 Plan which will guide longterm protection and management of the Great Barrier Reef.

 (2) Development of the Program will include an analysis of existing monitoring against Reef 2050 Plan deliverables. The Program will drive the integration of existing monitoring, modelling and reporting programs to capitalise on current program investments and avoid duplication of effort. This will inform improvements and efficiencies where there may be gaps in monitoring, data management, analysis, reporting and the effectiveness of management tools.

 (3) It is intended that effectiveness of this Plan, in accordance with the objectives of the Act, will also be captured in this Program.

Division 4—Use of the Planning Area

Subdivision 1—Overview

1.21  Values

  The Planning Area is one of the most important tourism areas on the Queensland coast and receives more than a third of all visitors to the Great Barrier Reef. While tourism activity is the predominant use of the Planning Area, the Authority has identified a broad range of existing uses in the Planning Area including recreation; education; marine facilities; commercial fishing; traditional fishing, hunting and gathering; shipping and port activities; and research.

1.22  Issues

  The Authority considers the following matters to be important in the way in which it manages use of the Planning Area:

 (a) ensuring that all activities in the Planning Area are ecologically sustainable and undertaken in accordance with best environmental practices;

 (b) ensuring that cultural and recreational use of the Planning Area is not inappropriately displaced by growth in commercial use of the Planning Area;

 (c) minimising disturbance to users caused by noisy and intrusive activities in the Planning Area;

 (d) ensuring that the remote qualities of some sites are not inadvertently lost through unplanned increases in use;

 (e) maintaining the range of opportunities for both frequent and infrequent users of the Planning Area;

 (f) ensuring that public access and the operation of vessels at popular anchorages is not constrained by the installation of privately owned facilities;

 (g) managing intensive use to ensure it does not devalue visitor experience at popular destinations;

 (h) managing the spatial distribution of tourist programs throughout the Planning Area;

 (i) preventing the scenic integrity of the Planning Area from being compromised by coastal development and the inappropriate installation of facilities in the Planning Area;

 (j) managing the effect of harvest fishing and aquaculture operations on other users of the Planning Area for the following reasons:

 (i) aquaculture operations may require exclusive use of large areas and may displace other users of the Planning Area;

 (ii) commercial collecting is perceived by many users of the Planning Area as incompatible with tourism and recreational use;

 (iii) the relatively limited extent of natural reef development (made up of mostly fringing reefs) in the Planning Area and the high levels of longstanding tourism and recreational use accentuates the effects of the activities mentioned in subparagraphs (i) and (ii);

 (k) managing the impact of tourism on other users of the Planning Area for the following reasons:

 (i) actual tourism use of the Planning Area is less than the potential level of use that is already permitted under current relevant permissions for tourist programs;

 (ii) tourism use in the Planning Area is growing and reports are being received by the Authority and the Queensland Government about congestion at certain sites which may be impacting on the values of the Planning Area or parts of the Planning Area.

1.23  Strategies

 (1) The Authority utilises the following strategies for managing Planning Area use:

 (a) generally focussing highest levels of use on the Hardy, Molle and Inner Whitsunday units referred to in the map in Part 2 of Schedule 1 to ensure that the limited resources being managed are used most effectively;

 (b) restricting the operation of vessels and aircraft in setting areas described in Table 1 (see clause 2.4);

 (c) restricting the operation of certain activities in setting areas to limit the potential for conflict at remote or low use sites (see clause 2.14);

 (d) developing site plans for sensitive or heavily used sites (see clause 1.25);

 (e) applying the policy Managing Tourism Permissions to Operate in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park (including Allocation, Latency and Tenure) to guide the management of tourism permissions.

Note: The Authority’s policy Managing Tourism Permissions to Operate in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park (including Allocation, Latency and Tenure) is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (2) With increasing levels of visitation to the Planning Area there is an increased risk of environmental damage and potential for an increase in competing activities. To manage the impact on the Area, and to continue to provide a range of recreation opportunities, the Authority has set limits on vessel length, group size, types of craft, facilities and certain activities in reefal and coastal waters of the Planning Area. These waters have been assigned ‘settings’, referred to in column 2 of Table 1, based on their values, existing use and management requirements. Column 3 of the table sets out a description of the setting. Column 4 of the table specifies the maximum group size for a setting and column 5 specifies the overall length of vessels visiting the setting area.

Table 1 Setting descriptions

 

Item

Setting

Description

Maximum group size (including crew)

Overall length of vessel (metres)

1

Setting 1

(Intensive)

Areas in this setting are immediately adjacent to urban areas and resorts. They are the access points to the Planning Area and a focus for intensive tourism and recreation. The areas are heavily used by a wide range of craft, and contain permanent facilities (for example, marinas, jetties and boat ramps).

No limit

Less than 70

2

Setting 2

(High use)

This is a natural setting that may have high levels of visitation. The areas in this setting are easily accessed, and appropriate facilities (for example, pontoons, moorings, markers) may be required to manage impacts and assist in visitor appreciation of the area. The areas are regularly visited by larger vessels and aircraft.

No limit

35 or less

3

Setting 3

(Moderate use)

This is a natural setting that may have moderate levels of visitation, with appropriate moorings and management facilities to manage impacts. The areas in this setting are occasionally visited by larger vessels and aircraft.

40 people

35 or less

4

Setting 4

(Low use)

This is a natural setting that has low levels of visitation. The areas in this setting are generally free from facilities, larger vessels and aircraft.

15 people

35 or less

5

Setting 5

(Protected)

This is a protected natural setting that has areas of outstanding or unique conservation value and areas of special management concern. Operations conducted in these areas are limited and managed according to individual site plans.

15 people

20 or less

Note: Site plans can be found on the Authority’s website at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Subdivision 2—Sensitive sites

1.24  Setting 5 (protected) areas

 (1) The following table sets out the sites in the Planning Area that have been designated (by Part 5 of Schedule 2) as setting 5 (protected) areas to protect their unique or outstanding nature conservation values, cultural and heritage values or scientific values.

 

Table 2 Setting 5 (protected) areas and their significant values

Item

Setting 5 (protected) area

Significant values

1

Cow and Calf Islands

Conservation: inshore fringing reef, mangrove

Remote area of scientific interest

2

Deloraine Island

Conservation: fringing reef, rare sponge species

Remote area

3

Double Bay East

Conservation: fringing reef, rare coral species

Mainland coastal area of scientific interest

4

Eshelby Islands

Conservation: seabird nesting and roosting

Commonwealth island with lighthouses etc.

Preservation Zone

5

Haslewood and Lupton Islands

Conservation: seagrass beds, turtle feeding and nesting, seabird nesting and roosting, fringing reef, including deepwater bommies

Source reef for Whitsundays

6

Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island (including the northern end of Whitehaven Beach)

 

Conservation: mangroves, seabird nesting

Scenic value: unique silica sand inlet and delta (a visual icon for the Whitsundays)

Cultural significance

Note: The values listed in the table are not exhaustive. They indicate the significance of each setting 5 (protected) area.

Capping of permissions

 (2) The Authority will not grant any new permissions for tourism operations to access a setting 5 (protected) area except under subclause (3).

 (3) The Authority may grant, to an operator conducting a cultural tour as part of a tourism operation under a relevant permission in the Planning Area, permission to access a setting 5 (protected) area for the purposes of the cultural tour, if:

 (a) the operator is a Traditional Owner or a Traditional Owner group; or

 (b) the operator is conducting the tour in collaboration with a Traditional Owner or a Traditional Owner group.

 (4) To avoid doubt, a relevant permission mentioned in subclause (3) includes a permission that is granted under subclause 1.36 (1).

 (5) For subclause (3):

cultural tour means:

 (a) a visit to a site or an area of cultural or heritage significance to Traditional Owners; and

 (b) includes the presentation to visitors of educational material about the cultural practices or beliefs of Traditional Owners in relation to the site or area.

1.24A  Significant bird sites

  The following table summarises for each significant bird site the limits on use of vessels and aircraft in and around the site that apply for particular periods under clause 2.11 and the Zoning Plan.

 

Limits on use of vessels and aircraft in and around significant bird sites

 

Site

No vessel access within site

Goslow for vessels—6 knots within site

No aircraft access below 1,500 feet within 1,000 metres of site

 

 

1 October 31 March

All year

1 October 31 March

All year

1 October 31 March

1

Armit Island (southern beach only)

 

 

 

2

Armit Islets (No 1)

 

 

 

3

Bird Island

 

 

 

4

Double Cone Island (western island only)

 

 

 

5

East Rock

(see note 1)

 

 

6

Edwin Rock

(see note 1)

 

 

7

Eshelby Islands (see note 2)

Zoning Plan limits access all year

Zoning Plan limits access all year

 

 

8

Grassy Island (southern beach only)

 

 

 

9

Olden Rock (south of Olden Island)

 

 

 

10

Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point)

 

 

 

11

South Repulse Island (western beach only)

 

 

 

Note 1: As there is no access to East Rock and Edwin Rock from 1 October to 31 March, the speed limit of 6 knots effectively applies from 1 April to 30 September.

Note 2: Eshelby Islands are located with a Preservation (pink) Zone under the Zoning Plan. Access to these islands is limited and only in accordance with the Zoning Plan.

Note 3: Significant bird site boundaries are set out in Schedule 6.

1.25  Site plans

 (1) Other sensitive sites in the Planning Area may be identified and the need for site plans for sensitive or heavily used sites in the Planning Area may arise from time to time. These will be developed through detailed site planning, with input from key stakeholders.

Note: Some examples of sensitive sites that may be identified are as follows:

(a) Blue Pearl Bay, Hayman Island;

(b) Hardy Reef;

(c) Langford Island;

(d) Lindeman and Seaforth Islands;

(e) Luncheon Bay, Hook Island;

(f) Mackerel Bay, Hook Island;

(g) Manta Ray Bay, Hook Island;

(h) Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island;

(i) Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island.

 (2) If the Authority develops a site plan for a sensitive site in the Planning Area that requires amendment of this Plan, the Authority will seek public comment on the proposed amendment in accordance with statutory requirements.

 (3) In preparing site plans, the Authority may consider the appropriateness of one or more of the following:

 (a) imposing additional requirements for bookings;

 (b) limiting the number of bookings that can be made for a day;

 (c) limiting or prohibiting multiple visits on a day;

 (d) allowing use of moorings, but not anchors, within a bay.

This does not limit what the Authority may consider in preparing site plans.

Subdivision 3—Moorings and tourist facilities

1.26  Policy overview—moorings and tourist facilities

 (1) Many moorings and tourist facilities exist in the Planning Area, particularly in setting 1 (intensive) areas, but also at Hardy Reef and several other popular destinations in the Planning Area. A number of public moorings and reef protection markers have also been installed in the Planning Area to protect the fragile reefs while providing continued access to popular destinations.

 (2) Public moorings are not limited by this Plan.

 (3) The installation of moorings and tourist facilities at popular destinations may result in the exclusion and displacement of other users.

Note: The Regulations contain provisions about applying for, and deciding whether to grant or refuse, permissions to install a mooring, pontoon or tourist facility or to operate a tourist program. Those provisions affect the installation of any mooring, pontoon or tourist facility.

 (4) The Authority recognises that it may be appropriate to provide some level of access to operators who wish to access public moorings on a regular basis. The Authority will only agree to grant such access after the requirements of broader community access have been considered.

Marine tourism contingency

 (6) If a permitted tourist program or facility is located in a place in the Planning Area and the place is severely damaged by a severe environmental incident, the Authority may permit the program or the facility to be temporarily relocated.

Note: The document published by the Authority and entitled Marine Tourism Contingency Plan for the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park, and the Marine Tourism Contingency Plan Application Form, can be found on the Authority’s website at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (7) However, the Authority will not grant, or modify the conditions of, a relevant permission so as to allow temporary relocation under subclause (6) of a tourist program or facility into a setting 5 (protected) area in which the program or facility was not located before the damage by a severe environmental incident occurred. This has effect despite clause 1.43.

1.27  New permissions for private moorings

 (1) The Authority will not grant a new permission for a private mooring to be installed in the Planning Area except as described in subclauses (2), (3), (4) and (5).

 (2) The Authority may grant a new permission for a private mooring to be installed:

 (a) in a setting 1 (intensive) area; or

 (b) in the Hardy Reef Location; or

 (c) as part of the temporary relocation of a tourist facility permitted under subclause 1.26(6).

 (3) The Authority may grant new permissions for a total of not more than 3 private moorings to be installed in the Woodwark Bay South Location if the Authority has prepared a site plan for each site where one of those moorings is to be installed.

 (4) The Authority may grant new permissions for a total of not more than 20 private moorings to be installed in the Planning Area, otherwise than as described in subclauses (2) and (3), in one or more parts of the Planning Area for each of which the Authority has prepared a site plan. The Authority may grant:

 (a) the permissions for up to 5 of the moorings to persons who are Traditional Owners of any site or area located in the Planning Area; and

 (b) the permissions for up to 15 of the moorings to other persons.

Note: Under the Regulations, a process of inviting expressions of interest for the grant of a new permission under subclause (3) or (4) for a private mooring applies.

 (5) The Authority may grant a new permission for a private mooring to be installed in the Planning Area if such a new permission becomes available because of the expiry, revocation or surrender of an earlier new permission of that kind (whether the earlier new permission was granted under subclause (3) or (4) or otherwise).

 (6) The conditions of a new permission for a private mooring to be installed in the Planning Area will require the mooring to be designed, placed and installed in a way that helps maintain the surrounding habitat and its ecological processes, if the new permission is granted:

 (a) under subclause (3) or (4); or

 (b) under subclause (5) in connection with an earlier new permission granted under subclause (3) or (4).

Note: The Authority’s Policy—Moorings in the Great Barrier Reef is available at www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

 (7) When considering a site for private moorings, it is the Authority’s preference to avoid installing these in heavily used areas as this can provide priority access to a small number of users. Public moorings are the preferred approach in heavily used areas.

1.28  Limit on tourist facilities (other than moorings)

 (1) The Authority will not grant a new permission for a tourist facility to be installed in the Planning Area, except:

 (a) in a setting 1 (intensive) area; or

 (b) in the Hardy Reef Location; or

 (c) for installation, in the Woodwark Bay South Location, of a tourist facility in relation to which both the following requirements are met:

 (i) the facility is unlikely to have any noticeable or lasting adverse impact on the values of the Marine Park or the public’s enjoyment of the Marine Park;

 (ii) the application for the permission for the facility is not required to be advertised under the Regulations; or

 (d) as part of the temporary relocation of a tourist facility permitted under subclause 1.26(6).

 (2) Subclause (1) does not apply to a new permission for a tourist facility that is a private mooring.

Note: Clause 1.27 deals with new permissions for installation of private moorings.

Subdivision 4—Limits on activities

1.29  Aerobatics, motorised water sports and high‑speed vessels

 (1) There are limits in setting areas on aerobatics, motorised water sport and use of highspeed vessels (see clauses 2.7 and 2.8).

 (2) The Authority will monitor the operation of vessels used for motorised water sport or at high speed to ensure that the vessels are being used legitimately, and that the vessels do not adversely affect other users of the Planning Area or the values of the Area.

1.30  No permissions for reef walking

  The Authority will not grant a permission for reef walking in the Planning Area.

Subdivision 5—Management of tourist programs

1.31  General

 (1) In order to protect the nature conservation, cultural and heritage values of the Planning Area it has been necessary to manage the number of tourist programs accessing the Planning Area.

 (2) A large number of different types of tourism operations are permitted to operate in the Planning Area. The Plan lists the types of tourism operations for which relevant permissions are granted. This approach requires clear definition of particular types of tourism operations (see clause 1.32), and has been adopted because tourism operations are more numerous, and cumulative in effect, than other uses in the Planning Area.

 (3) Generally, tourism operations involving aircraft or vessels are either standard tour operations or regional tour operations, depending on the approved level of access to the Planning Area (see clause 1.32).

 (4) Certain tourism operations have met specific criteria and are permitted to have access above the limits set out in Part 2. The level of access was determined by taking into account the levels of use of the Planning Area before the commencement of the Plan in 1998, and permission for the access was given on the basis of the specified criteria (which can be viewed in earlier versions of the Plan) being met.

Note: Earlier versions of this Plan can be found on the Federal Register of Legislation website at https://www.legislation.gov.au.

 (5) The level of access provided by a relevant permission is subject to assessment and the decision of the Authority in accordance with the Regulations.

1.32  Types of tourism operations—access rights and operational requirements

Interpretation

 (1) This clause is subject to a contrary intention in the Plan.

 (2) The limits on the access rights for a person conducting a tourism operation are set out in Part 2. However, the person’s relevant permission may increase or decrease those limits (see, for example, subclauses 2.4 (8) and 2.14 (4)).

Categories of tourism operation

 (3) The categories of tourism operation in the Planning Area are as follows:

 (a) a bareboat operation;

 (b) a Bowen operation;

 (c) a craftless operation;

 (d) a large ship operation;

 (e) a hire operation;

 (f) a long range roving operation;

 (g) a nonmotorised operation;

 (h) a passenger transport operation;

 (i) a regional tour operation;

 (j) a standard tour operation;

 (k) a support service operation.

Note: The categories of tourism operation are defined in Schedule 9.

Bareboat operation—access right

 (4) The access right of a bareboat operation is up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission, subject to provisions relating to bareboats in the Regulations.

Note: The number of permissions that allow bareboat operations access to the Planning Area has been capped: see clause 1.35.

Bowen operation—access rights and requirement

 (5) The access rights and operational requirements of a Bowen operation are either:

 (a) all of the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission:

 (i) that it operate from Bowen;

 (ii) passengers who are part of the operation must embark or disembark at Bowen;

 (iii) up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking; or

 (b) as otherwise provided for through an allocation process:

 (i) that occurred before the commencement of this clause; and

 (ii) that allocated the rights set out in the operator’s relevant permission.

Note: The number of permissions that allow Bowen operations access to the Planning Area has been capped: see clause 1.35.

Craftless operation—access right

 (6) The access right of a craftless operation is up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission, subject to the same access and activity conditions as the permitted vessel or aircraft that is being used.

Hire operation—access rights and requirement

 (7) The access rights and operational requirements of a hire operation are the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission:

 (a) up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking;

 (b) the operation is limited to operating in a setting 1 (intensive) area or the Woodwark Bay South Location (see subclauses 2.14(3) and (5)).

Note 1: See Schedule 9 for definitions of hire craft and hire equipment.

Note 2: Paragraph (7)(b) does not limit users of hire craft or hire equipment provided by a hire operation.

Large ship operation—access rights and requirements

 (8) The access rights and operational requirements of a large ship operation are the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission:

 (a) up to 50 days access each year to the Planning Area (by the large ship being used in the operation and, if that large ship is a cruise ship, by any tenders and aircraft transiting as described in paragraph (e)) with a booking (see subclause 2.5(1));

 (b) a booking required to anchor at a designated anchorage (see paragraph 2.4(7)(c));

 (c) access to a designated anchorage, with access limited to one large ship at a time, except at each of the Turtle Bay designated anchorage and the Funnel Bay designated anchorage, where up to 2 large ships may anchor at a time (see subclause 2.4(9));

 (d) a requirement not to access any parts of the Planning Area that are outside the General Use Zone and Shipping Area except when the large ship being used in the operation is transiting to or from a designated anchorage, or is anchored at such an anchorage (see subclause 2.8(5));

 (e) for a large ship operation using a cruise ship, a requirement that tenders not be used in the Planning Area to conduct tourist program activities, except by transiting between the cruise ship and:

 (i) a place outside the Planning Area; or

 (ii) a tourist facility within, or partly within, the Planning Area;

  (see subclause 2.8(6)).

Note: The Regulations list the designated anchorages.

Long range roving operation—access rights and requirements

 (9) The access rights and operational requirements of a long range roving operation are the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission:

 (a) up to 100 days access each year to the Planning Area;

 (b) access under paragraph (a) is limited to 2 visits per Location in any 7 consecutive days (with the visit or visits together being no longer than 48 hours in duration);

 (c) it may exceed setting limits only if:

 (i) the terms of a relevant permission allow it to exceed setting limits; and

 (ii) the operation is not operating in accordance with paragraph (e);

 (d) it must not carry more than 30 passengers in addition to crew unless operating in circumstances described in paragraph (e);

 (e) it may carry more than 30 passengers up to 10 days each year if:

 (i) the operation complies with group size setting limits; and

 (ii) the operator has notified the Authority, in writing, about such an operation before conducting the operation.

Note: The number of permissions that allow long range roving operations access to the Planning Area has been capped: see clause 1.35.

Nonmotorised operation—access rights

 (10) The access rights of a nonmotorised operation are up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission.

Passenger transport operation—access rights

 (11) The access rights of a passenger transport operation are the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission;

 (a) up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking;

 (b) the operation is limited to setting 1 (intensive) areas, except when transiting the Planning Area.

Regional tour operation (vessels)—access rights

 (12) The access rights of a regional tour operation involving a vessel are either:

 (a) both of the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission;

 (i) up to daily access without a booking to the Planning Area;

 (ii) it may exceed setting limits if the terms of a relevant permission allow it to exceed setting limits (see subclause 2.4 (8)); or

 (b) as otherwise provided for through an allocation process:

 (i) that occurred before the commencement of this clause; and

 (ii) that allocated the rights set out in the operator’s relevant permission.

Note: The number of permissions that allow regional tour operations access to the Planning Area has been capped: see clause 1.35.

Regional tour operation (aircraft)—access rights and requirements

 (13) The access rights and operational requirements of a regional tour operation involving an aircraft are either:

 (a) all of the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission;

 (i) up to daily access without a booking to the Planning Area;

 (ii) access under subparagraph (i) is limited to 2 visits per Location (with the visit or visits together being no longer than 48 hours in duration) in any 7 consecutive days, unless operating to a regular aircraft landing area (see subclauses 2.7(1) and (1A));

 (iii) a requirement not to conduct as part of a tourist program scenic flights in the Planning Area below 1,000 feet (above ground or water) (see subclause 2.7(2));

 (iv) it may exceed setting limits only if the terms of a relevant permission allow it to exceed the setting limits (see subclause 2.4 (8)); or

 (b) as otherwise provided for through an allocation process:

 (i) that occurred before the commencement of this clause; and

 (ii) that allocated the rights set out in the operator’s relevant permission.

Standard tour operation (vessel)—access right

 (14) The access rights of a standard tour operation involving a vessel are:

 (a) up to 50 days access each year to the Planning Area subject to a booking, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission (see subclauses 2.5 (1) and (2)); or

 (b) as otherwise provided for through an allocation process:

 (i) that occurred before the commencement of this clause; and

 (ii) that allocated the rights set out in the operator’s relevant permission.

Note: There are only 20 bookings available per day for vessels and aircraft to access the Planning Area: see clause 1.33.

Standard tour operation (aircraft)—access rights

 (15) The access rights of a standard tour operation involving an aircraft are either:

 (a) all of the following, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission;

 (i) up to 50 days access each year to the Planning Area subject to a booking (see subclauses 2.5 (1) and (2));

 (ii) access under subparagraph (i) is limited to 2 visits per Location (with the visit or visits together being no longer than 48 hours in duration) in any 7 consecutive days, unless operating to a regular aircraft landing area (see subclauses 2.7(1) and (1A));

 (iii) a requirement not to conduct as part of a tourist program scenic flights in the Planning Area below 1,000 feet (above ground or water) (see subclause 2.7(2)); or

 (b) as otherwise provided for through an allocation process:

 (i) that occurred before the commencement of this clause; and

 (ii) that allocated the rights set out in the operator’s relevant permission.

Support service operation (vessel or aircraft)—access right

 (16) The access right of a support service operation involving a vessel or an aircraft is up to daily access to the Planning Area without a booking, in accordance with the terms of a relevant permission.

1.33  Bookings

 (1) This Plan sets out when access to the Planning Area or a part of the Planning Area, or use of an anchorage, is not permitted without a booking.

Note: Clause 2.5 requires a booking to conduct a large ship operation or standard tour operation in the Planning Area using a vessel or aircraft. Clause 2.4 requires bookings to anchor large ships and large vessels at certain anchorages.

 (2) The total number of bookings for standard tour operations to operate in the Planning Area is 20 per day.

 (3) The total number of bookings for large ship operations using a cruise ship to operate in the Planning Area is 3 per day.

Note: Information on how to make a booking can be found on the Authority’s website at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

1.34  Permissions for tourism operations—policy overview

 (1) This Plan limits the activities that can take place in the Planning Area and limits certain conversions between types of tourism operation, while allowing for growth in tourist visitation to the area and greater flexibility for most tourist programs.

 (2) The Authority intends that only relevant permissions that are consistent with this Plan will be granted by it for tourism operations in the Planning Area. Requirements and procedures for applications, assessments and decisions (including the review of decisions) for relevant permissions are set out in the Act, the Zoning Plan and the Regulations.

1.35  Tourism permissions that are capped

 (1) The Authority will not grant a new permission for a person to conduct a regional tour operation other than under subclause 1.36(1), (1A) or (5).

 (2) The Authority will not grant a new permission for a person to conduct a bareboat operation.

 (3) The Authority will not grant a new permission for a person to conduct a long range roving operation.

 (4) The Authority will not grant a relevant permission for a person to conduct a Bowen operation if the total number of permissions for Bowen operations in force is 10.

 (5) Subclauses (1), (2), (3) and (4) do not prevent the Authority from granting a permission described in any of those subclauses to allow temporary relocation under subclause 1.26(6) of a tourist program of which the tourism operation mentioned in subclause (1), (2), (3) or (4) forms part.

Note 1: The Authority’s policy relating to bareboats is contained in the document published by the Authority and entitled Managing Bareboat Operations in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park. The document includes guidance on when conversions between bareboat and crewed vessel operations will be permitted (see also clause 1.41) and can be found on the Authority’s website at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Note 2: The Regulations provide for when a relevant permission ceases to be in force for the purposes of applications for further permissions.

1.36  Granting new permissions for regional tour operations

 (1) The Authority may grant to persons who are Traditional Owners of any site or area located in the Planning Area up to 10 new permissions to conduct regional tour operations.

 (1A) The Authority may grant up to 5 new permissions to conduct regional tour operations using a fixedwing aircraft (that is not a seaplane, flying boat or amphibian) for scenic flights without landing in the Planning Area.

 (2) Subclauses (1) and (1A) do not prevent the grant of a new permission to conduct a regional tour operation to any person to allow temporary relocation under subclause 1.26(6) of a tourist program of which the regional tour operation forms part.

 (3) A permission mentioned in subclause (1) or (1A) may permit a regional tour operation to have daily access to the Planning Area without a booking.

 (4) The Authority will seek community and industry input when determining the timing of the release of the new permissions mentioned in subclause (1) or (1A).

 (5) The Authority may grant a new permission for a regional tour operation if such a new permission becomes available because of the expiry, revocation or surrender of an earlier new permission of that kind (whether the earlier new permission was granted under subclause (1) or (1A) or otherwise).

Note 1: Under the Regulations, a process of inviting expressions of interest for the grant of a new permission (under subclause (1), (1A) or (5)) for a regional tour operation applies.

Note 2: Information about the way tourism permissions are managed by the Authority can be found on the Authority’s website at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

1.37  Fishing or collecting as part of a tourist program

 (1) The Authority will not grant any new permissions for tourist programs that involve fishing or collecting in the Planning Area, except in the following zones:

 (a) the General Use Zone;

 (b) the Habitat Protection Zone.

 (2) Subclause (1) does not prevent the Authority from granting a new permission to allow temporary relocation under subclause 1.26(6) of a tourist program that is conducted under another relevant permission that permits the program to involve fishing or collecting in the Planning Area outside the General Use Zone or Habitat Protection Zone.

1.39  Harvest fishing and aquaculture operations

  To address the issues mentioned in paragraph 1.22 (j) associated with harvest fishing and aquaculture operations in the Planning Area, the Authority:

 (a) has relocated all harvest fisheries and aquaculture operations that were permitted to occur under earlier versions of this Plan to areas outside the Planning Area; and

 (b) will not grant any relevant permissions for harvest fishing or aquaculture operations in the Planning Area.

Note: Earlier versions of this Plan can be found on the Federal Register of Legislation website at www.legislation.gov.au.

1.40  Permission replication and splitting

 (1) The effective management of the impact of tourism operations in the Planning Area, particularly those that involve anchoring or alighting, relies fundamentally on the limits set by this Plan. Consequently, any attempts to circumvent the limits set by the Plan by, for example, conducting one tourism operation using multiple permissions, will undermine the Plan.

 (2) The Authority will manage permissions and bookings to ensure permission replication or permit splitting does not circumvent the intention of the Plan. The actions needed to address this issue include, but are not limited to:

 (a) requiring, when granting a permission for a tourism operation, that all relevant permissions for that tourism operation in the Planning Area are surrendered, have been revoked or have expired; and

 (b) requiring that a person will not hold more than one relevant permission for that tourism operation in the Planning Area; and

 (c) requiring that more than one person may be granted a relevant permission for a single tourism operation only if each permission for that operation has been assessed as meeting eligibility criteria referred to in earlier versions of this Plan.

Note: Earlier versions of this Plan can be found on the Federal Register of Legislation website at www.legislation.gov.au.

 (3) Certain tourism operations will not be allowed to operate in the Planning Area on more than 50 days each year.

 (4) The Authority will identify an individual tourism operation on the basis of the primary vessel or aircraft that is used for the operation. The operation of a vessel or aircraft across multiple permissions is not a legitimate basis for exceeding the limit (eg. a limit of 50 days access each year to the Planning Area) that is intended to apply to the tourism operation. The Authority will manage the permit and booking systems to ensure that the intended limits are not undermined.

1.41  Conversion between bareboat and crewed vessel (regional tour operation) operations

 (1) The bareboat and crewed vessel fleet are intensive users of the Planning Area. The activities of the fleet are managed to maintain sustainable use of the Planning Area and a range of opportunities for all users.

 (2) The Plan caps the number of crewed vessels (regional tour operations) and the number of bareboats operating in the Planning Area. The Authority intends that the total number of crewed vessels (regional tour operations) and bareboats will not be increased. However, the number of bareboats may be increased by up to 10, provided that there is an equal reduction in the number of crewed vessels (regional tour operations) and vice versa.

 (3) Unless consistent with the circumstances mentioned in subclause (2), the Authority must not convert a relevant permission that has been granted for the purpose of conducting a tourism operation to a permission to conduct a bareboat operation.

Note: The Authority’s policy in relation to the conversion of relevant permissions for bareboat and crewed vessel operations is set out in the document published by the Authority and entitled Managing Bareboat Operations in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park. The document can be found on the Authority's website at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

1.42  Conversion between tourism operations

  The Authority must not convert a relevant permission that has been granted for the purposes of any of the following tourism operations to a permission for any other type of operation (whether or not specified in the following list), and must not convert a permission for any other type of operation to a permission for an operation that is listed:

 (a) aircraft operations;

 (b) Bowen operations;

 (c) craftless operations;

 (d) hire operations;

 (e) long range roving operations;

 (f) passenger transport operations

 (g) support service operations.

1.43  Further permissions

  The Authority intends that if:

 (a) a relevant permission (the original permission) was granted giving access rights for a tourist program; and

 (b) the access rights were different to the access right restrictions set out in Part 2;

then, when a further permission is granted in respect of the original permission, the access rights may remain the same.

Note 1: Information about the way tourism permissions are managed by the Authority can be found in the document published by the Authority and entitled Managing Tourism Permissions to Operate in the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park (Including Allocation, Latency and Tenure). The document may be accessed on the Authority’s web site at http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au.

Note 2: The Regulations provide for:

(a) when a relevant permission ceases to be in force for the purposes of applications for further permissions; and

(b) transfers of permissions.

1.44  Special tourism permissions for which only certain persons may apply

  The following relevant permissions are declared to be special tourism permissions for the purposes of the Regulations:

 (a) a relevant permission to conduct any of the following tourism operations in the Planning Area:

 (i) a bareboat operation;

 (ii) a Bowen operation;

 (iii) a long range roving operation;

 (iv) a regional tour operation;

 (b) a relevant permission to conduct a standard tour operation involving fishing or collecting in the Planning Area outside the General Use Zone and the Habitat Protection Zone.

Note: The Regulations limit who may apply for a special tourism permission to:

(a) a past holder of the permission; or

(b) a person selected through a process involving public invitation of expressions of interest in the permission and ranking of any such expressions of interest in order of merit according to published criteria.

Part 2—Enforcement provisions

Note 1: Regulations may be made providing for giving effect to the enforcement provisions of a plan of management or to the enforcement provisions of an amendment of a plan of management: see s 66 (2) (ba) of the Act.

Note 2: The Act contains a number of offences relating to zones.

Division 1—Preliminary

2.1  How many people on a vessel

  A calculation of the number of people that a vessel is carrying for the purposes of a provision in this Part must include each person on board the vessel who is aged 4 years or older (unless the provision says the person is not to be included).

Note: The following persons must be included in the calculation if they are on board a vessel (unless the provision says they are not to be):

(a) officers and members of the vessel’s crew;

(b) any person on board the vessel who is to help with an activity associated with the use of the vessel (for example, a tour guide or diving instructor).

2.3  When this Part does not apply

 (1) Nothing in this Part prohibits or restricts anything being done:

 (a) by a law-enforcement authority of the Commonwealth or Queensland for its work; or

 (b) for observation or surveillance by, or on behalf of, an authority of the Commonwealth or Queensland; or

 (c) in accordance with Part 5 of the Zoning Plan; or

 (d) in accordance with a relevant permission, granted under the Regulations, authorising the carrying on of an activity not mentioned in, or considered by the Authority in the preparation of, this Plan.

Note: Part 5 of the Zoning Plan is about additional purposes for use and entry, such as saving life, dealing with an environmental emergency, and managing the Marine Park.

 (2) If the Authority gives written permission to do something for the purpose of research, nothing in this Part prevents or restricts anything being done in accordance with the written permission.

 (3) This Part does not apply to the installation or use of a navigation aid.

2.3A  Permissions must be consistent with this Plan

 (1) The Authority must not grant a relevant permission to use or enter the Planning Area that is inconsistent with this Plan.

Determining inconsistency with this Plan

 (2) For the purposes of subclause (1), assume that subclause 2.4(8) were not included in this Plan.

Note: That subclause effectively provides for a permission to override other provisions of this Plan that would otherwise prohibit or limit activities covered by the permission.

Exception for permissions for temporary relocation because of severe damage by a severe environmental incident

 (3) Subclauses (1) and (2) do not prevent the Authority from granting a permission described in subclause 2.4(8) to allow temporary relocation under subclause 1.26(6) of a tourist program or tourist facility.

Exception for certain permissions like old permissions

 (4) Subclauses (1) and (2) do not prevent the Authority from granting to a person (the applicant) a permission (the replacement permission) that is covered by subclause (5) if, when the application for the replacement permission was made, either:

 (a) there was in force another permission held by the applicant that was of the same kind; or

 (b) the applicant satisfied any requirements prescribed by the Regulations to be allowed to make the application.

 (5) This subclause covers a relevant permission that:

 (a) directly or indirectly arises out of another permission to conduct an operation that:

 (i) was described in subclause 1.12(2) of this Plan as in force immediately before 18 December 2008 and met the requirements of subclause 1.12(3), (4) or (5) (as affected by subclause 1.12(6), if relevant) of this Plan as in force then; or

 (ii) was described in subclause 1.13(2) of this Plan as in force immediately before 18 December 2008 and met the requirements of subclause 1.13(3), (4), (4B) or (4C) (as affected by subclause 1.13(4A) or (4D), if relevant) of this Plan as in force then; or

 (b) becomes available because of the expiry, revocation or surrender of:

 (i) an earlier permission to conduct an operation described in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii); or

 (ii) another permission directly or indirectly arising out of a permission described in subparagraph (i); or

 (c) is a permission, other than a new permission, to conduct a bareboat operation or a long range roving operation.

Note: The other permission described in paragraph (a) is one that:

(a) permitted an operation for more than 50 days a year or with groups larger than what are now the group size setting limits; and

(b) was granted after the Authority assessed the application against certain eligibility criteria.

2.3B  Permissions for conduct with no or low adverse impact on values of Planning Area

 (1) This Plan does not prevent the Authority from granting a relevant permission that is applied for on or after 1 January 2018 if:

 (a) in dealing under the Regulations with the application, the Authority has assessed the risks of the conduct proposed to be permitted and is satisfied that the conduct:

 (i) is not likely to have an adverse impact on any of the values of the Planning Area; or

 (ii) is likely to have only a low adverse impact on any of those values; and

 (b) the conduct permitted by the permission accords with the intent of this Plan, and objects, mentioned in clause 1.3.

Note: This clause does not limit the Authority’s discretion under the Regulations to refuse to grant the permission.

 (2) This clause has effect despite any other provision of this Plan.

Division 2—General restrictions on the operation of vessels and aircraft

2.4  Vessels not to be operated in certain setting areas

 (1) A person must not operate a large ship in a setting area.

Note 1: Setting areas are set out in Schedule 2.

Note 2: Large ship is defined in Schedule 9.

 (2) Subject to subclause (3), a person must not operate a vessel that has an overall length of more than 35 metres in a setting 2 (high use) area.

 (3) A person may operate a vessel that has an overall length that is less than 70 metres in the part of the area described in clause 13 of Schedule 2 that is Hardy Reef if the vessel is operating to a mooring or pontoon.

 (4) A person must not operate, in a setting 3 (moderate use) area, a vessel that:

 (a) is more than 35 metres in overall length; or

 (b) is carrying more than 40 people.

 (5) A person must not operate, in a setting 4 (low use) area, a vessel that:

 (a) is more than 35 metres in overall length; or

 (b) is carrying more than 15 people.

 (6) A person must not operate, in a setting 5 (protected) area, a vessel:

 (a) that has an overall length of more than 20 metres; or

 (b) carrying more than 15 people.

 (7) Subclauses (1) to (6) do not prevent a person from:

 (a) operating a vessel other than a ship to transit a setting area in which the person would be prohibited from operating the vessel apart from this paragraph; or

 (b) operating a large ship to transit to or from a designated anchorage; or

 (c) anchoring a large ship or large vessel at a designated anchorage at a time if:

 (i) there is a booking to anchor the ship or vessel at the anchorage at the time; and

 (ii) if the ship or vessel is anchored by an anchor and chain—the anchor and chain are within the anchorage; and

 (iii) if the ship or vessel is anchored without the use of an anchor—the ship or vessel is anchored centrally within the anchorage;

  (even if the anchorage is in a setting area in which the person would be prohibited from operating the ship or vessel apart from this paragraph); or

 (d) operating a vessel in a setting area to transfer passengers to or from:

 (i) a vessel at a designated anchorage in the setting area; or

 (ii) a superyacht at a superyacht anchorage in the setting area; or

 (e) navigating a ship in a setting area within a Shipping Area if keeping the ship outside the setting area would unreasonably affect navigation of the ship through the Shipping Area.

Note: Paragraphs (a) and (e)—ship is defined in Schedule 9.

 (7A) Subclause (2) and paragraphs (4)(a) and (5)(a) do not prevent a person from anchoring a superyacht at a superyacht anchorage at a time if:

 (a) there is a booking to anchor the superyacht at the anchorage at the time; and

 (b) the superyacht is less than 70 metres in overall length; and

 (c) the superyacht is carrying not more than 12 people other than master and crew; and

 (d) if the superyacht is anchored by an anchor and chain—the anchor and chain are within the anchorage; and

 (e) if the superyacht is anchored without the use of an anchor—the superyacht is anchored centrally within the anchorage.

This applies even if the anchorage is in a setting area in which the person would be prohibited from operating the superyacht, apart from this subclause.

 (8) If a relevant permission allows a person to operate a vessel in a setting area in a way that does not comply with subclause (1), (2), (3), (4), (5) or (6) then, despite any of those subclauses, the permission prevails.

 (9) A person must not anchor a large ship at a designated anchorage if:

 (a) in the case of an anchorage other than the Turtle Bay designated anchorage and the Funnel Bay designated anchorage—another large ship is already anchored at the anchorage; or

 (b) in the case of the Turtle Bay designated anchorage or the Funnel Bay designated anchorage—2 large ships are already anchored at the anchorage.

 (9A) A person must not anchor a vessel at a superyacht anchorage at a time unless:

 (a) the vessel is a superyacht that:

 (i) is less than 70 metres in overall length; and

 (ii) is carrying not more than 12 people other than master and crew; and

 (b) there is a booking to anchor the superyacht at the anchorage at the time; and

 (c) if the superyacht is anchored by an anchor and chain—the anchor and chain are within the anchorage; and

 (d) if the superyacht is anchored without the use of an anchor—the superyacht is anchored centrally within the anchorage.

 (9B) A person must not anchor a superyacht at a superyacht anchorage at which another vessel is already anchoring or anchored, unless:

 (a) the Regulations indicate that the capacity of the superyacht anchorage is more than one superyacht; and

 (b) the number of vessels already anchoring or anchored at the superyacht anchorage is less than the number of superyachts specified in the Regulations as the capacity of the superyacht anchorage.

 (10) In subclause (3), a vessel that is operating as part of a tourism operation is operating to a mooring or pontoon if the vessel:

 (a) remains attached to the mooring or pontoon during the operation; or

 (b) if it is not attached as mentioned in paragraph (a)—is not attached to the mooring or pontoon during the operation because it is transiting the Marine Park to or from the mooring or pontoon by the most direct reasonable route.

2.5  Operation of tourism operations in the Planning Area

Large ship operations and standard tour operations

 (1) A person must not conduct a large ship operation or a standard tour operation in the Planning Area on more than 50 days each year.

 (2) A person must not conduct a large ship operation or a standard tour operation in the Planning Area on a day without a booking to conduct the operation in the Planning Area on that day.

Long range roving operations

 (3) A person must not conduct a long range roving operation in the Planning Area:

 (a) on more than 100 days each year; or

 (b) so as to visit a particular Location:

 (i) more than twice in any 7 consecutive days; or

 (ii) for a total of more than 48 hours in any 7 consecutive days; or

 (c) so as to carry aboard the vessel being used for the operation more than 30 passengers (excluding master and crew):

 (i) on more than 10 days each year; or

 (ii) on a day in relation to which the person has not notified the Authority in advance that more than 30 passengers will be carried aboard the vessel.

Note: Clause 2.4 will also limit the number of passengers that may be carried on the vessel being used in a setting area for a long range roving operation (subject to the permission under which the operation is being conducted).

2.5A  Passenger transport operations

  A person conducting a passenger transport operation must ensure that:

 (a) the operation is conducted using the most direct reasonable routes in transporting passengers on a vessel or aircraft throughout the Planning Area; and

 (b) on the route, the vessel or aircraft does not stop except:

 (i) to pick up passengers; or

 (ii) for passengers to disembark at their destination; or

 (iii) in the case of an emergency.

2.5B  Support service operations

  A person conducting a support service operation must ensure that a vessel or aircraft used to conduct the operation:

 (a) is not operated in continuous association with the vessel or aircraft being serviced as part of the support service operation; and

 (b) does not remain associated with the vessel or aircraft being serviced for longer than is necessary to provide the service; and

 (c) is used only to offer services (excluding, for example, sale of food and drink) that are essential to the continued safe and effective operation of the vessel or aircraft being serviced; and

 (d) is not used to transport a person for the purpose of tourism.

2.7  Limits on operation of aircraft

Limits on operating in Locations

 (1) A person must not operate an aircraft in a Location more than twice in any 7 consecutive days, except to land at, or take off from:

 (a) Hamilton Island Airport, the Lindeman Island airstrip or the Whitsunday airstrip; or

 (b) a regular aircraft landing area within the Location.

Minimum height for scenic flights

 (1A) However, a person may taxi an aircraft by the most direct and reasonable route (in either direction) between the regular aircraft landing area within the Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island Location and the landward edge of that Location southeast of that regular aircraft landing area.

 (2) A person must not operate an aircraft for scenic flights, as part of a tourist program, below 1 000 feet (above ground or water) in the Planning Area.

Limit on aerobatics in setting areas

 (3) A person must not operate an aircraft for aerobatics in a setting area, except a setting 1 (intensive) area.

Note: A setting area includes airspace to a height of 3,000 feet.

2.8  Other limits on use of vessels

General prohibition on highspeed vessels in most setting areas

 (1) A person must not operate a highspeed vessel in a setting area, unless that area is:

 (a) a setting 1 (intensive) area; or

 (b) a designated motorised water sports area.

Exception for personal watercraft used for tourism and transiting certain routes

 (2) Despite subclause (1), a person may operate a personal watercraft to transit a setting area as part of a tourist program if:

 (a) the person is not, during the transit, operating the personal watercraft for motorised water sport; and

 (b) the transit is part of a longer transit (in either direction) between a place described in column 1 of an item of the following table and a place described in column 2 of that item, by a route that does not pass the eastern coast of either North Molle Island or South Molle Island.

 

Places between which a personal watercraft may be operated as part of a tourist program

 

Column 1
Place

Column 2
Place

1

Airlie Beach

North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

2

Airlie Beach

Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

3

Airlie Beach

East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

4

Airlie Beach

Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

5

Airlie Beach

Woodwark Bay South Location

6

Shute Harbour

North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

7

Shute Harbour

Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

8

Shute Harbour

East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

9

Shute Harbour

Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

10

Shute Harbour

Woodwark Bay South Location

11

North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

12

North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

13

North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island, setting 1 (intensive) area

Exception for transiting nontourist highspeed vessels

 (3) Despite subclause (1), a person may operate a highspeed vessel to transit a setting area otherwise than as part of a tourist program if the person is not, during the transit, operating the vessel for motorised water sport.

Prohibition on motorised water sport in certain setting areas

 (4) A person must not operate a vessel for motorised water sport in a setting area unless the area is:

 (a) a setting 1 (intensive) area; or

 (b) a designated motorised water sports area.

Note: Restrictions apply to vessels operating in a setting area: see clause 2.4.

Limits on large ships operating as part of tourist program

 (5) A person must not operate a large ship as part of a tourist program in the Planning Area except:

 (a) in the General Use Zone; or

 (b) in a Shipping Area; or

 (c) to anchor at, or transit to or from, a designated anchorage.

Note: The General Use Zone and the Shipping Area are set out in the Schedule to the Zoning Plan.

Limits on cruise ship’s tenders operating as part of tourist program

 (6) A person must not operate a cruise ship’s tender in the Planning Area to conduct tourist program activities, except when transiting between the cruise ship and:

 (a) a place outside the Planning Area; or

 (b) a tourist facility within, or partly within, the Planning Area.

Division 3—Wildlife protection

2.11  Activities in or near significant bird sites

Permanent ban on aircraft operation below 1,500 feet within 1,000 metres

 (1) A person must not operate an aircraft, below 1,500 feet (above ground or water), to approach within 1,000 metres of any of the following significant bird sites:

 (a) Bird Island;

 (b) East Rock;

 (c) Edwin Rock;

 (d) Eshelby Islands.

Seasonal ban on aircraft operation below 1,500 feet within 1,000 metres

 (2) A person must not operate an aircraft, below 1,500 feet (above ground or water), to approach within 1,000 metres of any of the following significant bird sites between 1 October and the next 31 March:

 (a) Armit Island (southern beach only);

 (b) Armit Islets (No 1);

 (c) Double Cone Island (western island only);

 (d) Grassy Island (southern beach only);

 (e) Olden Rock (south of Olden Island);

 (f) Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point);

 (g) South Repulse Island (western beach only).

Seasonal nogo zones for vessels

 (3) A person must not operate a vessel within any of the following significant bird sites between 1 October and the next 31 March:

 (a) East Rock;

 (b) Edwin Rock;

 (c) Olden Rock (south of Olden Island).

Note: Eshelby Islands are located with a Preservation (pink) Zone under the Zoning Plan. Access to these islands is limited and only in accordance with the Zoning Plan.

Permanent speed limit for vessels in Bird Island significant bird site

 (4) A person must not operate a vessel at a speed greater than 6 knots within the Bird Island significant bird site.

Seasonal speed limits for vessels

 (5) A person must not operate a vessel at a speed greater than 6 knots within any of the following significant bird sites between 1 October and the next 31 March:

 (a) Armit Island (southern beach only);

 (b) Armit Islets (No 1);

 (c) Double Cone Island (western island only);

 (d) Grassy Island (southern beach only);

 (e) Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point);

 (f) South Repulse Island (western beach only).

 (6) A person must not operate a vessel at a speed greater than 6 knots within any of the following significant bird sites between 1 April and the next 30 September:

 (a) East Rock;

 (b) Edwin Rock.

2.12  Protecting coral

 (1) A person must not damage coral.

 (2) The conduct prohibited by subclause (1) does not include:

 (a) damaging coral by anchoring, if the person who anchors takes reasonable care to avoid damaging the coral, and an anchor of the kind commonly called a reef pick is used; or

 (b) taking coral in accordance with a relevant permission.

 (3) A person must not drop an anchor for a vessel, an aircraft, or any other facility in a noanchoring area.

Note 1: The Regulations list the noanchoring areas.

Note 2: This subclause does not prohibit a person from causing a vessel, aircraft or other facility to become or remain stationary in a noanchoring area without the dropping of an anchor.

Division 4—Other activities

2.14  Certain commercial activities

 (1) Except in a setting 1 (intensive) area, a person must not carry on a retail operation in the Planning Area.

Note: Setting areas are set out in Schedule 2. Setting 1 (intensive) areas are set out in Part 1 of that Schedule.

 (2) Except in a setting 1 (intensive) area, a person must not carry on an operation involving the selling of services in the Planning Area.

 (3) Except in a setting 1 (intensive) area, a person must not carry on a hire operation in the Planning Area.

 (4) Subclauses (1), (2) and (3) do not prevent a person from conducting a support service operation in accordance with a relevant permission.

 (5) Subclauses (1), (2) and (3) do not prevent a person from conducting in the Woodwark Bay South Location either a hire operation using hire equipment or a nonmotorised operation.

Schedule 1—The Planning Area

(clauses 1.2 and 2.3A)

Part 1—Geographic description of area

 

The Planning Area is areas 1 and 2 described below, and, at any point, extends vertically to 3,000 feet above the ground or water surface.

1.  Area 1—Gloucester, Molle, Whitsunday, Repulse and Lindeman Units

  Area 1 is the area of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park bounded by a line commencing at the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148º7.181' E (at or about 2003.602 S, 14827.181 E) then running progressively as described in the following table:

 

Item

Description

1

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19º58.025 S, 14818.597 E

2

Easterly along the geodesic to 19º57.924 S, 14912.296 E

3

Southerly along the geodesic to 20º32.341 S, 14912.263 E

4

Westerly along the geodesic to 20º39.169 S, 14845.825 E

5

North along the meridian to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water (at or about 20º28.791 S, 14845.825 E)

6

Northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148º44.017 E (at or about 2015.217 S, 14844.017 E)

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148º40.870 E (at or about 2013.880 S, 14840.870 E)

8

Northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the point of commencement

2.  Area 2 – Hardy Unit

  Area 2 is the area of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park bounded by a line commencing at 19º36.324 S, 14902.713 E then running progressively as described in the following table:

 

Item

Description

1

Easterly along the geodesic to 19º36.241 S, 14917.746 E

2

Southerly along the geodesic to 19º51.024 S, 14917.846 E

3

Westerly along the geodesic to 19º51.141 S, 14902.780 E

4

Northerly along the geodesic to the point of commencement

Part 2—Map of area

 

Schedule 2—Setting areas

Note: See the definitions of setting area, setting 1 (intensive) area, setting 2 (high use) area, setting 3 (moderate use) area, setting 4 (low use) area and setting 5 (protected) area in Schedule 9.

Part 1—Setting 1 (intensive) areas

 

1  Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Daydream and West South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.756′S 148°48.874′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.756′S to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.756′S (at the point closest to 20°14.756′S 148°49.751′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.905′E (at the point closest to 20°15.144′S 148°49.905′E)

4

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water at the meridian 148°49.891′E (at the point closest to 20°15.279′S 148°49.891′E)

5

Southerly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline and the parallel 20°16.293′S (at the point closest to 20°16.293′S 148°49.535′E)

6

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°15.893′S 148°48.465′E

7

North along the meridian 148°48.465′E to latitude 20°15.201′S

8

East along the parallel 20°15.201′S to the intersection of the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.201′S (at the point closest to 20°15.201′S 148°48.756′E)

9

Generally southerly then easterly then northerly along the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.874′E (at the point closest to 20°15.025′S 148°48.874′E)

10

North along the meridian 148°48.874′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

2  Dingo Beach setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Dingo Beach setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dingo Beach setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.270′S 148°29.470′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°04.708′S 148°30.116′E

3

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°29.835′E (at the point closest to 20°05.350′S 148°29.835′E)

4

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°04.704′S (at the point closest to 20°04.704′S 148°29.024′E)

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

3  Earlando Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Earlando Resort setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Earlando Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°34.592′E (at the point closest to 20°08.552′S 148°34.592′E)

2

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.315′S (at the point closest to 20°09.315′S 148°34.640′E)

3

Generally westerly then northerly then northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

4  East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

  The East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Mid Molle and South Molle Islands setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.567′S 148°50.688′E

2

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.863′E (at the point closest to 20°15.389′S 148°50.863′E)

3

Generally southwesterly then northwesterly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.891′E (at the point closest to 20°15.279′S 148°49.891′E)

4

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.905′E (at the point closest to 20°15.144′S 148°49.905′E)

5

Northerly along the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.756′S (at the point closest to 20°14.756′S 148°49.820′E)

6

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

5  Hamilton Island and Dent Passage setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Hamilton Island and Dent Passage setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hamilton Island and Dent Passage setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.588′S 148°56.875′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.588′S to longitude 148°57.348′E

3

South along the meridian 148°57.348′E to latitude 20°19.925′S

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°20.100′S 148°57.570′E

5

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°20.381′S 148°57.926′E

6

East along the parallel 20°20.381′S to longitude 148°58.745′E

7

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°20.635′S 148°59.229′E

8

South along the meridian 148°59.229′E to latitude 20°21.366′S

9

West along the parallel 20°21.366′S to longitude 148°58.964′E

10

South along the meridian 148°58.964′E to latitude 20°21.936′S

11

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°22.249′S 148°58.632′E

12

West along the parallel 20°22.249′S to longitude 148°58.139′E

13

South along the meridian 148°58.139′E to latitude 20°22.487′S

14

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°22.690′S 148°57.939′E

15

West along the parallel 20°22.690′S to longitude 148°57.453′E

16

South along the meridian 148°57.453′E to latitude 20°22.914′S

17

West along the parallel 20°22.914′S to longitude 148°56.355′E

18

North along the meridian 148°56.355′E to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.355′E (at the point closest to 20°22.890′S 148°56.355′E)

19

Generally northeasterly then northerly then northwesterly along the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.686′E (at the point closest to 20°20.217′S 148°55.686′E)

20

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

6  Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.102′S 148°50.527′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.102′S to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.102′S (at the point closest to 20°19.102′S 148°50.930′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.681′S (at the point closest to 20°20.681′S 148°50.839′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°20.681′S to longitude 148°50.490′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.490′E to latitude 20°20.314′S

6

West along the parallel 20°20.314′S to longitude 148°50.337′E

7

North along the meridian 148°50.337′E to latitude 20°19.791′S

8

East along the parallel 20°19.791′S to longitude 148°50.527′E

9

North along the meridian 148°50.527′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

7  Hayman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Hayman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hayman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°03.516′S (at the point closest to 20°03.516′S 148°52.701′E)

2

Generally southeasterly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.658′E (at the point closest to 20°03.798′S 148°53.658′E)

3

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the parallel 20°05.269′S (at the point closest to 20°05.269′S 148°53.123′E)

4

Northwesterly along the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge to the intersection of the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the meridian of 148°52.375′E (at the point closest to 20°04.639′S 148°52.375′E)

5

Northerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

8  Hook Island Observatory and Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Hook Island Observatory and Resort setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hook Island Observatory and Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.073′E (at the point closest to 20°09.444′S 148°57.073′E)

2

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°10.057′S 148°56.865′E

3

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.931′S (at the point closest to 20°09.931′S 148°56.582′E)

4

Generally northeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

9  Lindeman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Lindeman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Lindeman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.034′E (at the point closest to 20°27.261′S 149°03.034′E)

2

South along the meridian 149°03.034′E to latitude 20°28.615′S

3

West along the parallel 20°28.615′S to longitude 149°01.817′E

4

North along the meridian 149°01.817′E to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.817′E (at the point closest to 20°27.156′S 149°01.817′E)

5

Generally southerly then northeasterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

10  Paradise Bay Resort, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

  The Paradise Bay Resort, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Paradise Bay Resort, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°51.339′E (at the point closest to 20°23.266′S 148°51.339′E)

2

Generally southeasterly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°51.770′E (at the point closest to 20°23.616′S 148°51.770′E)

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°23.796′S 148°51.456′E

4

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°23.441′S 148°51.069′E

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

Part 2—Setting 2 (high use) areas

 

11  Black Island setting 2 (high use) area

  The Black Island setting 2 (high use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Black Island setting 2 (high use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.502′S 148°53.480′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.502′S to longitude 148°53.731′E

3

South along the meridian 148°53.731′E to latitude 20°05.278′S

4

West along the parallel 20°05.278′S to longitude 148°53.366′E

5

North along the meridian 148°53.366′E to latitude 20°04.716′S

6

Northerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

12  Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands setting 2 (high use) area

  The Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands setting 2 (high use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands setting 2 (high use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.249′S 148°54.772′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.249′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.249′S (at the point closest to 20°14.249′S 148°56.271′E)

3

Generally southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.530′E (at the point closest to 20°14.637′S 148°56.530′E)

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.974′S (at the point closest to 20°14.974′S 148°57.200′E)

5

Generally southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.267′E (at the point closest to 20°15.755′S 148°56.267′E)

6

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.926′S (at the point closest to 20°15.926′S 148°55.336′E)

7

Generally northerly then westerly along the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°54.772′E (at the point closest to 20°15.205′S 148°54.772′E)

8

North along the meridian 148°54.772′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

13  Hardy, Hook and Line Reefs setting 2 (high use) area

  The Hardy, Hook and Line Reefs setting 2 (high use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hardy, Hook and Line Reefs setting 2 (high use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°43.268′S 149°07.120′E

2

East along the parallel 19°43.268′S to longitude 149°13.994′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°45.506′S 149°17.509′E

4

South along the meridian 149°17.509′E to latitude 19°49.260′S

5

West along the parallel 19°49.260′S to the intersection of Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge and the parallel 19°49.260′S (at the point closest to 19°49.260′S 149°15.038′E)

6

Generally northwesterly along the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge to the intersection of Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge with meridian 149°11.622′E (at the point closest to 19°45.884′S 149°11.622′E)

7

West along the parallel 19°45.884′S to longitude 149°07.120′E

8

North along the meridian 149°07.120′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

14  Southern Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area

  The Southern Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Southern Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.844′E (at the point closest to 20°18.610′S 149°02.844′E)

2

South along the meridian 149°02.844′E to latitude 20°19.727′S

3

West along the parallel 20°19.727′S to longitude 148°59.822′E

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°20.381′S 148°58.745′E

5

West along the parallel 20°20.381′S to longitude 148°57.926′E

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°20.100′S 148°57.570′E

7

North along the meridian 148°57.570′E to the intersection of the Fitzalan Island (20041b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.570′E (at the point closest to 20°19.976′S 148°57.570′E)

8

Generally northeasterly along the Fitzalan Island (20041b) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Fitzalan Island (20041b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.685′E (at the point closest to 20°19.801′S 148°57.685′E)

9

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.806′E (at the point closest to 20°19.728′S 148°57.806′E)

10

Generally easterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

15  Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area

  The Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island setting 2 (high use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.041′S 149°02.789′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°17.279′S 149°03.075′E

3

East along the parallel 20°17.279′S to longitude 149°03.516′E

4

South along the meridian 149°03.516′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.516′E (at the point closest to 20°17.557′S 149°03.516′E)

5

Generally southerly then northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.571′E (at the point closest to 20°17.233′S 149°02.571′E)

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

Part 3—Setting 3 (moderate use) areas

 

16  Bluff Point setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Bluff Point setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bluff Point setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.976′S (at the point closest to 20°12.976′S 148°39.687′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°12.976′S to longitude 148°41.003′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°13.602′S 148°41.948′E

4

South along the meridian 148°41.948′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the parallel 20°14.338′S (at the point closest to 20°14.338′S 148°41.948′E)

5

Northwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°13.880′S (at the point closest to 20°13.880′S 148°40.870′E)

6

Generally southwesterly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

17  Cateran Bay, Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Cateran Bay, Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cateran Bay, Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Border Island (20067) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.032′S (at the point closest to 20°09.032′S 149°02.230′E)

2

Generally southerly then westerly then northwesterly along the Border Island (20067) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of Border Island (20067) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.382′E (at the point closest to 20°09.355′S 149°01.382′E)

3

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

18  Clarke’s Cove setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Clarke’s Cove setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Clarke’s Cove setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.315′S (at the point closest to 20°09.315′S 148°34.640′E)

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°35.105′E (at the point closest to 20°09.892′S 148°35.105′E)

3

Generally southwesterly then westerly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

19  Eastern Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Eastern Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Eastern Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Border Island (20067) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.687′E (at the point closest to 20°09.378′S 149°02.687′E)

2

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Border Island (20067) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°10.659′S (at the point closest to 20°10.659′S 149°02.616′E)

3

Generally northwesterly then northerly then northeasterly along the Border Island (20067) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

20  Hook, Line and Barb Reefs Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Hook, Line and Barb Reefs Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hook, Line and Barb Reefs Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°43.268′S 149°06.257′E

2

East along the parallel 19°43.268′S to longitude 149°07.120′E

3

South along the meridian 149°07.120′E to latitude 19°45.884′S

4

East along the parallel 19°45.884′S to the intersection of the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge and the meridian 149°11.622′E (at the point closest to 19°45.884′S 149°11.622′E)

5

Generally southeasterly along the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge to the intersection of the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge and the meridian 149°15.038′E (at the point closest to 19°49.260′S 149°15.038′E)

6

East along the parallel 19°49.260′S to longitude 149°16.022′E

7

South along the meridian 149°16.022′E to latitude 19°50.646′S

8

West along the parallel 19°50.646′S to longitude 149°02.951′E

9

North along the meridian 149°02.951′E to latitude 19°46.634′S

10

East along the parallel 19°46.634′S to longitude 149°06.257′E

11

North along the meridian 149°06.257′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

21  Kennedy Sound, Lindeman, Seaforth and Shaw Islands setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Kennedy Sound, Lindeman, Seaforth and Shaw Islands setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Kennedy Sound, Lindeman, Seaforth and Shaw Islands setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.115′S (at the point closest to 20°27.115′S 149°04.491′E)

2

Generally southerly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°28.650′S (at the point closest to 20°28.650′S 149°04.160′E)

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.277′E (at the point closest to 20°30.212′S 149°02.277′E)

4

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°28.615′S 149°01.817′E)

5

East along the parallel 20°28.615′S to longitude 149°03.034′E

6

North along the meridian 149°03.034′E to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.034′E (at the point closest to 20°27.261′S 149°03.034′E)

7

Generally easterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.194′S (at the point closest to 20°27.194′S 149°03.933′E)

8

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

22  Langford/Black Islands Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area

 (1) The Langford/Black Islands Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Langford/Black Islands Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°01.338′S 148°52.299′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.850′E (at the point closest to 20°02.188′S 148°52.850′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°03.516′S (at the point closest to 20°03.516′S 148°52.701′E )

4

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the meridian 148°52.375′E (at the point closest to 20°04.639′S 148°52.375′E)

5

Southeasterly along the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge to the intersection of the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the parallel 20°05.269′S (at the point closest to 20°05.269′S 148°53.123′E)

6

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°03.798′S (at the point closest to 20°03.798′S 148°53.658′E)

7

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 148°54.326′E (at the point closest to 20°04.205′S 148°54.326′E)

8

Generally southwesterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°07.361′S (at the point closest to 20°07.361′S 148°53.048′E)

9

West along the parallel 20°07.361′S to longitude 148°52.127′E

10

North along the meridian 148°52.127′E to latitude 20°06.450′S

11

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°05.913′S 148°51.318′E

12

North along the meridian 148°51.318′E to latitude 20°03.283′S

13

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

(2) However, the Langford/Black Islands Complex setting 3 (moderate use) area does not include the Black Island setting 2 (high use) area.

23  Line Reef setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Line Reef setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Line Reef setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°36.573′S 149°12.112′E

2

East along the parallel 19°36.573′S to longitude 149°13.994′E

3

South along the meridian 149°13.994′E to latitude 19°43.268′S

4

West along the parallel 19°43.268′S to longitude 149°07.120′E

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

24  Mackerel Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Mackerel Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Mackerel Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°58.026′E (at the point closest to 20°04.316′S 148°58.026′E)

2

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.517′E (at the point closest to 20°05.646′S 148°57.517′E)

3

Generally westerly then northerly then northeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

25  Molle Channel setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Molle Channel setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Molle Channel setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°11.982′S 148°48.042′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.619′E (at the point closest to 20°12.818′S 148°48.619′E)

3

Generally westerly then southerly then southeasterly along the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.766′E (at the point closest to 20°14.548′S 148°49.766′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°49.766′E to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.766′E (at the point closest to 20°14.746′S 148°49.766′E)

5

Generally westerly along the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.756′S (at the point closest to 20°14.756′S 148°49.751′E)

6

West along the parallel 20°14.756′S to longitude 148°48.874′E

7

South along the meridian 148°48.874′E to the intersection of the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.874′E (at the point closest to 20°15.025′S 148°48.874′E)

8

Generally southwesterly along the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.201′S (at the point closest to 20°15.201′S 148°48.756′E)

9

West along the parallel 20°15.201′S to longitude 148°48.465′E

10

South along the meridian 148°48.465′E to latitude 20°15.893′S

11

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.293′S (at the point closest to 20°16.293′S 148°49.535′E)

12

Generally southeasterly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.056′E (at the point closest to 20°16.957′S 148°50.056′E)

13

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°17.727′S 148°50.409′E

14

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.040′S 148°49.893′E

15

West along the parallel 20°18.040′S to longitude 148°49.493′E

16

South along the meridian 148°49.493′E to latitude 20°18.626′S

17

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.293′S (at the point closest to 20°19.293′S 148°48.992′E)

18

Generally westerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°47.100′E (at the point closest to 20°18.522′S 148°47.100′E)

19

North along the meridian 148°47.100′E to the intersect of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°47.100′E (at the point closest to 20°17.587′S 148°47.100′E)

20

Generally northeasterly then northwesterly then southwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary (at the point closest to 20°15.217′S 148°44.017′E)

21

Northwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°43.189′E (at the point closest to 20°14.865′S 148°43.189′E)

22

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°12.673′S 148°44.999′E

23

East along the parallel 20°12.673′S to longitude 148°45.723′E

24

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°13.696′S 148°47.277′E

25

South along the meridian 148°47.277′E to latitude 20°15.732′S

26

East along the parallel 20°15.732′S to longitude 148°48.042′E

27

North along the meridian 148°48.042′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

26  North Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The North Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

North Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°02.757′S 148°55.330′E

2

East along the parallel 20°02.757′S to longitude 148°57.837′E

3

South along the meridian 148°57.837′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.837′E (at the point closest to 20°03.671′S 148°057.837′E)

4

Generally westerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.330′E (at the point closest to 20°03.734′S 148°55.330′E)

5

North along the meridian 148°55.330′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

27  Pandanus Bay, Long Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Pandanus Bay, Long Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Pandanus Bay, Long Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Pelican Island (20805) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.246′S (at the point closest to 20°20.246′S 148°51.394′E)

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°20.312′S 148°51.467′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.467′E to latitude 20°20.874′S

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.145′S (at the point closest to 20°21.145′S 148°51.319′E)

5

Generally northerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.124′S (at the point closest to 20°20.124′S 148°51.228′E)

6

Generally southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Pelican Island (20805) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.198′S (at the point closest to 20°20.198′S 148°51.286′E)

7

Generally southeasterly then easterly along the Pelican Island (20805) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

28  Roberta Bay, Shaw Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Roberta Bay, Shaw Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Roberta Bay, Shaw Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.939′E (at the point closest to 20°29.476′S 149°05.939′E)

2

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°30.225′S (at the point closest to 20°30.225′S 149°04.660′E)

3

Generally northerly then northeasterly then southeasterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

29  Saba Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Saba Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Saba Bay, Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.445′S 148°57.406′E

2

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°06.858′S (at the point closest to 20°06.858′S 148°56.556′E)

3

Generally northwesterly then northeasterly then southeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

30  South Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The South Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Hook Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.396′S 148°57.157′E

2

Easterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.372′E (at the point closest to 20°09.445′S 148°57.372′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.497′S (at the point closest to 20°11.497′S 148°57.383′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°11.497′S to longitude 148°54.809′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°11.032′S 148°54.147′E

6

West along the parallel 20°11.032′S to longitude 148°52.854′E

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°10.506′S 148°52.365′E

8

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.949′E (at the point closest to 20°09.764′S 148°52.949′E)

9

Generally easterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.931′S (at the point closest to 20°09.931′S 148°56.582′E)

10

Easterly along the geodesic to 20°10.057′S 148°56.865′E

11

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.073′E (at the point closest to 20°09.444′S 148°57.073′E)

12

Generally northeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

31  South Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The South Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.249′S 148°54.303′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.249′S to longitude 148°54.772′E

3

South along the meridian 148°54.772′E to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°54.772′E (at the point closest to 20°15.205′S 148°54.772′E)

4

Generally southwesterly then southerly then easterly then northeasterly along the Cid island (20040a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of Cid island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.926′S (at the point closest to 20°15.926′S 148°55.336′E)

5

Easterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.267′E (at the point closest to 20°15.755′S 148°56.267′E)

6

Generally southwesterly then southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.240′E (at the point closest to 20°18.438′S 148°56.240′E)

7

Easterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.081′E (at the point closest to 20°18.467′S 148°57.081′E)

8

Generally northeasterly then southerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.806′E (at the point closest to 20°19.728′S 148°57.806′E)

9

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Fitzalan Island (20041b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.685′E (at the point closest to 20°19.801′S 148°57.685′E)

10

Generally northwesterly then southwesterly then southerly along the Fitzalan Island (20041b) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Fitzalan Island (20041b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.570′E (at the point closest to 20°19.976′S 148°57.570′E)

11

South along the meridian 148°57.570′E to latitude 20°20.100′S

12

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.925′S 148°57.348′E

13

North along the meridian 148°57.348′E to latitude 20°19.588′S

14

West along the parallel 20°19.588′S to longitude 148°56.875′E

15

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.686′E (at the point closest to 20°20.217′S 148°55.686′E)

16

Generally southwesterly then southerly along the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.355′E (at the point closest to 20°22.890′S 148°56.355′E)

17

South along the meridian 148°56.355′E to latitude 20°22.914′S

18

East along the parallel 20°22.914′S to longitude 148°57.453′E

19

North along the meridian 148°57.453′E to latitude 20°22.690′S

20

East along the parallel 20°22.690′S to longitude 148°57.939′E

21

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°22.487′S 148°58.139′E

22

North along the meridian 148°58.139′E to latitude 20°22.249′S

23

East along the parallel 20°22.249′S to longitude 148°58.632′E

24

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°21.936′S 148°58.964′E

25

North along the meridian 148°58.964′E to latitude 20°21.366′S

26

East along the parallel 20°21.366′S to longitude 148°59.229′E

27

North along the meridian 148°59.229′E to latitude 20°20.635′S

28

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°20.381′S 148°58.745′E

29

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°19.727′S 148°59.822′E

30

South along the meridian 148°59.822͔′E to latitude 20°20.480′S

31

East along the parallel 20°20.480′S to longitude 149°02.455′E

32

South along the meridian 149°02.455′E to latitude 20°22.133′S

33

West along the parallel 20°22.133′S to longitude 149°00.567′E

34

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°22.465′S 149°00.190′E

35

West along the parallel 20°22.465′S to longitude 148°59.246′E

36

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°23.729′S 148°57.390′E

37

West along the parallel 20°23.729′S to longitude 148°55.701′E

38

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°22.034′S 148°54.659′E

39

North along the meridian 148°54.659′E to latitude 20°19.859′S

40

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°16.583′S 148°53.429′E

41

North along the meridian 148°53.429′E to latitude 20°15.301′S

42

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

32  South‑eastern Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Southeastern Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Southeastern Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°16.297′S 149°02.822′E

2

East along the parallel 20°16.297′S to longitude 149°03.382′E

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°16.699′S 149°03.195′E

4

East along the parallel 20°16.699′S to longitude 149°03.388′E

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°16.323′S 149°03.546′E

6

East along the parallel 20°16.323′S to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.323′S (at the point closest to 20°16.323′S 149°04.511′E)

7

Generally southwesterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.713′S (at the point closest to 20°17.713′S 149°04.164′E)

8

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Teague Island (20082a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.026′E (at the point closest to 20°18.041′S 149°04.026′E)

9

Generally southerly along the Teague Island (20082a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Teague Island (20082a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.140′E (at the point closest to 20°18.632′S 149°04.140′E)

10

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.409′S 149°03.605′E

11

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°19.727′S 149°02.844′E

12

North along the meridian 149°02.844′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.844′E (at the point closest to 20°18.610′S 149°02.844′E)

13

Generally northerly, then north easterly, then northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.516′E (at the point closest to 20°17.557′S 149°03.516′E)

14

North along the meridian 149°03.516′E to latitude 20°17.279′S

15

West along the parallel 20°17.279′S to longitude 149°03.075′E

16

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°17.041′S 149°02.789′E

17

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.571′E (at the point closest to 20°17.233′S 149°02.571′E)

18

Generally northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.218′E (at the point closest to 20°16.817′S 149°02.218′E)

19

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

33  Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°00.716′E (at the point closest to 20°14.119′S 149°00.716′E)

2

Easterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.205′S (at the point closest to 20°14.205′S 149°01.304′E)

3

Generally southwesterly then northeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

34  Woodwark Bay setting 3 (moderate use) area

  The Woodwark Bay setting 3 (moderate use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Woodwark Bay setting 3 (moderate use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°10.417′S (at the point closest to 20°10.417′S 148°38.764′E)

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°40.089′E (at the point closest to 20°11.587′S 148°40.089′E)

3

Generally southwesterly then westerly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

Part 4—Setting 4 (low use) areas

 

35  Armit Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Armit Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Armit Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.858′S 148°37.996′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.858′S to longitude 148°40.620′E

3

South along the meridian 148°40.620′E to latitude 20°07.472′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.472′S to longitude 148°37.996′E

5

North along the meridian 148°37.996′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

36  Border and Deloraine Islands Complex setting 4 (low use) area

 (1) The Border and Deloraine Islands Complex setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Border and Deloraine Islands Complex setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°08.192′S 149°00.797′E

2

East along the parallel 20°08.192′S to longitude 149°05.404′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.404′E to latitude 20°10.596′S

4

West along the parallel 20°10.596′S to longitude 149°03.478′E

5

South along the meridian 149°03.478′E to latitude 20°11.132′S

6

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°11.850′S 149°02.710′E

7

West along the parallel 20°11.850′S to longitude 149°01.560′E

8

North along the meridian 149°01.560′E to latitude 20°11.400′S

9

West along the parallel 20°11.400′S to longitude 149°00.797′E

10

North along the meridian 149°00.797′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

 (2) However, the Border and Deloraine Islands Complex setting 4 (low use) area does not include the Cateran Bay, Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area, the Eastern Border Island setting 3 (moderate use) area or the Deloraine Island setting 5 (sensitive) area.

37  Burning Point and Shaw island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Burning Point and Shaw Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Burning Point and Shaw island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°28.650′S (at the point closest to 20°28.650′S 149°04.160′E)

2

Generally southerly then westerly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.277′E (at the point closest to 20°30.212′S 149°02.277′E)

3

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

38  Double Cone Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Double Cone Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Cone Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.198′S 148°42.725′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.198′S to longitude 148°44.355′E

3

South along the meridian 148°44.355′E to latitude 20°07.074′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.074′S to longitude 148°43.352′E

5

South along the meridian 148°43.352′E to latitude 20°07.587′S

6

West along the parallel 20°07.587′S to longitude 148°41.577′E

7

North along the meridian 148°41.577′E to latitude 20°05.994′S

8

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

39  East Hayman and North West Hook Islands setting 4 (low use) area

  The East Hayman and North West Hook Islands setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Hayman and North West Hook Islands setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°01.338′S 148°52.299′E

2

East along the parallel 20°01.338′S to longitude 148°53.426′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°02.757′S 148°55.016′E

4

East along the parallel 20°02.757′S to longitude 148°55.330′E

5

South along the meridian 148°55.330′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.330′E (at the point closest to 20°03.734′S 148°55.330′E)

6

Generally southwesterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°04.205′S (at the point closest to 20°04.205′S 148°54.326′E)

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.658′E (at the point closest to 20°03.798′S 148°53.658′E)

8

Generally northwesterly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.850′E (at the point closest to 20°02.188′S 148°52.850′E)

9

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

40  East Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The East Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°02.757′S 148°57.837′E

2

East along the parallel 20°02.757′S to longitude 148°58.319′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°03.921′S 148°59.318′E

4

South along the meridian 148°59.318′E to latitude 20°05.025′S

5

West along the parallel 20°05.025′S to longitude 148′58.456′ E

6

South along the meridian 148°58.456′E to latitude 20°07.230′S

7

West along the parallel 20°07.230′S to longitude 148°57.743′E

8

South along the meridian 148°57.743′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.743′E (at the point closest to 20°09.303′S 148°57.743′E)

9

Generally westerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.445′S (at the point closest to 20°09.445′S 148°57.372′E)

10

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.396′S (at the point closest to 20°09.396′S 148°57.157′E)

11

Generally northerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°06.858′S (at the point closest to 20°06.858′S 148°56.556′E)

12

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.406′E (at the point closest to 20°06.445′S 148°57.406′E)

13

Generally northerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.517′E (at the point closest to 20°05.646′S 148°57.517′E)

14

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°58.026′E (at the point closest to 20°04.316′S 148°58.026′E)

15

Generally northeasterly then northerly then northwesterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.837′E (at the point closest to 20°03.671′S 148°57.837′E)

16

North along the meridian 148°57.837′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

41  East Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The East Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°08.498′S 148°57.743′E

2

East along the parallel 20°08.498′S to longitude 148°58.596′E

3

South along the meridian 148°58.596′E to latitude 20°08.760′S

4

East along the parallel 20°08.760′S to longitude 149°00.797′E

5

South along the meridian 149°00.797′E to latitude 20°13.045′S

6

East along the parallel 20°13.045′S to longitude 149°03.595′E

7

South along the meridian 149°03.595′E to latitude 20°14.310′S

8

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°14.984′S 149°02.725′E

9

West along the parallel 20°14.984′S to longitude 149°02.331′E

10

South along the meridian 149°02.331′E to latitude 20°15.110′S

11

East along the parallel 20°15.110′S to longitude 149°02.725′E

12

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°15.392′S 149°03.382′E

13

South along the meridian 149°03.382′E to latitude 20°16.297′S

14

West along the parallel 20°16.297′S to longitude 149°02.822′E

15

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.817′S (at the point closest to 20°16.817′S 149°02.218′E)

16

Generally northerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.824′S (at the point closest to 20°15.824′S 149°01.693′E)

17

East along the parallel 20°15.824′S to longitude 149°02.039′E

18

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°15.400′S 149°01.866′E

19

North along the meridian 149°01.866′E to latitude 20°14.324′S

20

West along the parallel 20°14.324′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.324′S (at the point closest to 20°14.324′S 149°01.539′E)

21

Generally northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.205′S (at the point closest to 20°14.205′S 149°01.304′E)

22

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.119′S (at the point closest to 20°14.119′S 149°00.716′E)

23

Generally northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.743′E (at the point closest to 20°09.303′S 148°57.743′E)

24

North along the meridian 148°57.743′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

42  Eshelby Island setting 4 (low use) area

 (1) The Eshelby Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Eshelby Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°59.938′S 148°36.389′E

2

East along the parallel 19°59.938′S to longitude 148°38.974′E

3

South along the meridian 148°38.974′E to latitude 20°02.462′S

4

West along the parallel 20°02.462′S to longitude 148°36.389′E

5

North along the meridian 148°36.389′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

 (2) However, the Eshelby Island setting 4 (low use) area does not include the Eshelby Islands setting 5 (protected) area.

43  Gloucester Island and Manta Ray Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Gloucester Island and Manta Ray Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Gloucester Island and Manta Ray Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°25.959′E (at the point closest to 19°58.011′S 148°25.959′E)

2

East along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°28.190′E (at the point closest to 19°58.007′S 148°28.190′E)

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°59.193′S 148°29.532′E

4

South along the meridian 148°29.530′E to latitude 20°2.724′S

5

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°02.994′S 148°29.850′E

6

South along the meridian 148°29.850′E to latitude 20°03.806′S

7

East along the parallel 20°03.806′S to longitude 148°31.160′E

8

South along the meridian 148°31.160′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°31.160′E (at the point closest to 20°05.418′S 148°31.160′E)

9

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°29.835′E (at the point closest to 20°05.350′S 148°29.835′E)

10

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°04.708′S 148°30.116′E

11

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°04.270′S 148°29.470′E

12

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the mainland coastline at mean low water and the intersection of the meridian 148°29.024′E (at the point closest to 20°04.704′S 148°29.024′E)

13

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°27.181′E (at the point closest to 20°03.602′S 148°27.181′E)

14

Northwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°25.327′E (at the point closest to 20°02.403′S 148°25.327′E)

15

North along the meridian 148°25.327′E to latitude 19°59.019′S

16

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

44  Grassy Island, Double Bay and Grimston Point setting 4 (low use) area

  The Grassy Island, Double Bay and Grimston Point setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Grassy Island, Double Bay and Grimston Point setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°07.173′S (at the point closest to 20°07.173′S 148°34.088′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°07.173′S to longitude 148°37.676′E

3

South along the meridian 148°37.676′E to latitude 20°09.422′S

4

East along the parallel 20°09.422′S to longitude 148°38.299′E

5

Easterly along the geodesic to 20°09.733′S 148°39.228′E

6

East along the parallel 20°09.733′S to longitude 148°41.544′E

7

South along the meridian 148°41.544′E to latitude 20°11.841′S

8

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°12.667′S 148°40.734′E

9

South along the meridian 148°40.734′E to latitude 20°12.976′S

10

West along the parallel 20°12.976′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.976′S (at the point closest to 20°12.976′S 148°39.687′E)

11

Generally northerly then southwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.587′S (at the point closest to 20°11.587′S 148°40.089′E)

12

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°10.417′S (at the point closest to 20°10.417′S 148°38.764′E)

13

Generally westerly then southwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.602′S (at the point closest to 20°11.602′S 148°37.663′E)

14

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°37.101′E (at the point closest to 20°12.966′S 148°37.101′E)

15

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°35.105′E (at the point closest to 20°09.892′S 148°35.105′E)

16

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.315′S (at the point closest to 20°09.315′S 148°34.640′E)

17

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°34.592′E (at the point closest to 20°08.552′S 148°34.592′E)

18

Generally northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

45  Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.240′E (at the point closest to 20°18.438′S 148°56.240′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then southerly then southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.081′E (at the point closest to 20°18.467′S 148°57.081′E)

3

Westerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

46  Harold and Edward Islands setting 4 (low use) area

  The Harold and Edward Islands setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Harold and Edward Islands setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.015′S 149°07.938′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.015′S to longitude 149°08.862′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°14.571′S 149°11.630′E

4

South along the meridian 149°11.630′E to latitude 20°15.862′S

5

West along the parallel 20°15.862′S to longitude 149°10.002′E

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°14.474′S 149°07.938′E

7

North along the meridian 149°07.938′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

47  Haslewood Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area

  The Haslewood Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Haslewood Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.254′S 149°05.679′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.254′S to longitude 149°06.480′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°15.600′S 149°08.400′E

4

South along the meridian 149°08.400′E to latitude 20°17.038′S

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.313′S 149°06.726′E

6

South along the meridian 149°06.726′E to latitude 20°19.409′S

7

West along the parallel 20°19.409′S to longitude 149°03.605′E

8

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Teague Island (20082a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.140′E (at the point closest to 20°18.632′S 149°04.140′E)

9

Generally northeasterly along the Teague Island (20082a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Teague Island (20082a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.026′E (at the point closest to 20°18.041′S 149°04.026′E)

10

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.713′S (at the point closest to 20°17.713′S 149°04.164′E)

11

Generally southeasterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.100′E (at the point closest to 20°18.348′S 149°05.100′E)

12

South along the meridian 149°05.100′E to latitude 20°18.405′S

13

East along the parallel 20°18.405′S to longitude 149°05.204′E

14

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°18.086′S 149°05.748′E

15

North along the meridian 149°05.748′E to latitude 20°17.450′S

16

East along the parallel 20°17.450′S to longitude 149°06.834′E

17

North along the meridian 149°06.834′E to latitude 20°16.934′S

18

East along the parallel 20°16.934′S to longitude 149°07.036′E

19

North along the meridian 149°07.036′E to latitude 20°16.358′S

20

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°15.608′S 149°06.779′E

21

West along the parallel 20°15.608′S to longitude 149°06.296′E

22

North along the meridian 149°06.296′E to latitude 20°14.994′S

23

West along the parallel 20°14.994′S to longitude 149°06.177′E

24

South along the meridian 149°06.177′E to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.177′E (at the point closest to 20°15.057′S 149°06.177′E)

25

Generally southwesterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.323′S (at the point closest to 20°16.323′S 149°04.511′E)

26

West along the parallel 20°16.323′S to longitude 149°03.546′E

27

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°15.123′S 149°03.876′E

28

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

48  Lady Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Lady Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Lady Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.530′E (at the point closest to 20°14.637′S 148°56.530′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then southeasterly then southerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.974′S (at the point closest to 20°14.974′S 148°57.200′E)

3

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

49  Lindeman Island complex setting 4 (low use) area

 (1) The Lindeman Island complex setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Lindeman Island complex setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°22.742′S 149°01.302′E

2

East along the parallel 20°22.742′S to longitude 149°03.005′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.005′E to latitude 20°25.246′S

4

East along the parallel 20°25.246′S to longitude 149°04.177′E

5

North along the meridian 149°04.177′E to latitude 20°24.218′S

6

East along the parallel 20°24.218′S to longitude 149°07.100′E

7

South along the meridian 149°07.100′E to latitude 20°26.996′S

8

East along the parallel 20°26.996′S to longitude 149°08.813′E

9

South along the meridian 149°08.813′E to latitude 20°29.777′S

10

West along the parallel 20°29.777′S to longitude 149°07.680′E

11

South along the meridian 149°07.680′E to latitude 20°30.416′S

12

West along the parallel 20°30.416′S to longitude 149°06.348′E

13

South along the meridian 149°06.348′E to latitude 20°31.355′S

14

East along the parallel 20°31.355′S to longitude 149°07.199′E

15

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°32.314′S 149°08.835′E

16

South along the meridian 149°08.835′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 149°08.835′E (at the point closest to 20°33.227′S 149°08.835′E)

17

Westerly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 149°03.778′E (at the point closest to 20°34.532′S 149°03.778′E)

18

North along the meridian 149°03.778′E to latitude 20°32.406′S

19

West along the parallel 20°32.406′S to longitude 149°01.090′E

20

North along the meridian 149°01.090′E to latitude 20°27.745′S

21

West along the parallel 20°27.745′S to longitude 148°59.487′E

22

North along the meridian 148°59.487′E to latitude 20°25.060′S

23

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

 (2) However, the Lindeman Island complex setting 4 (low use) area does not include the Kennedy Sound, Lindeman, Seaforth and Shaw Islands setting 3 (moderate use) area, the Lindeman Island Resort setting 1 (intensive) area, the Burning Point and Shaw island setting 4 (low use) or the Roberta Bay, Shaw Island setting 3 (moderate use) area.

50  Long Island setting 4 (low use) area

 (1) The Long Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Long Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°18.141′S 148°50.639′E

2

East along the parallel 20°18.141′S to longitude 148°52.357′E

3

South along the meridian 148°52.357′E to latitude 20°21.378′S

4

East along the parallel 20°21.378′S to longitude 148°53.826′E

5

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°22.779′S 148°54.644′E

6

South along the meridian 148°54.644′E to latitude 20°23.900′S

7

West along the parallel 20°23.900′S to longitude 148°53.322′E

8

South along the meridian 148°53.322′E to latitude 20°24.562′S

9

West along the parallel 20°24.562′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°24.562′S (at the point closest to 20°24.562′S 148°50.387′E)

10

Generally northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.293′S (at the point closest to 20°19.293′S 148°48.992′ E)

11

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°18.626′S 148°49.493′E

12

East along the parallel 20°18.626′S to longitude 148°49.893′ E

13

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

 (2) However, the Long Island setting 4 (low use) area does not include the Pandanus Bay, Long Island setting 3 (moderate use) area, the Paradise Bay Resort, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area or the Happy and Palm Bay Resorts, Long Island setting 1 (intensive) area.

51  Middle Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Middle Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Middle Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°58.145′S 148°20.700′E

2

East along the parallel 19°58.145′S to longitude 148°23.114′E

3

South along the meridian 148°23.114′E to latitude 20°00.236′S

4

West along the parallel 20°00.236′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the parallel 20°00.236′S (at the point closest to 20°00.236′S 148°22.000′E)

5

Northwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°20.700′E (at the point closest to 19°59.392′S 148°20.700′E)

6

North along the meridian 148°20.700′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

52  North Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The North Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

North Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°11.982′S 148°48.042′E

2

East along the parallel 20°11.982′S to longitude 148°49.403′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°13.637′S 148°50.688′E

4

South along the meridian 148°50.688′E to latitude 20°14.567′S

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.756′S (at the point closest to 20°14.756′S 148°49.820′E)

6

Generally northwesterly along the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.766′E (at the point closest to 20°14.746′S 148°49.766′E)

7

North along the meridian 148°49.766′E to the intersection of the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.766′E (at the point closest to 20°14.548′S 148°49.766′E)

8

Generally northeasterly then northerly then northwesterly along the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.619′E (at the point closest to 20°12.818′S 148°48.619′E)

9

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

53  Petrel Islet setting 4 (low use) area

  The Petrel Islet setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Petrel Islet setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°11.153′S 149°06.169′E

2

East along the parallel 20°11.153′S to longitude 149°07.622′E

3

South along the meridian 149°07.622′E to latitude 20°12.593′S

4

West along the parallel 20°12.593′S to longitude 149°06.169′E

5

North along the meridian 149°06.169′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

54  Puritan Bay, Round Head, Genesta Bay, Cape Conway, Defiance Island setting 4 (low use) area

 (1) The Puritan Bay, Round Head, Genesta Bay, Cape Conway, Defiance Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Puritan Bay, Round Head, Genesta Bay, Cape Conway, Defiance Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°24.562′S (at the point closest to 20°24.562′S 148°50.387′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°24.562′S to longitude 148°51.140′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°25.247′S 148°51.907′E

4

South along the meridian 148°51.907′E to latitude 20°25.994′S

5

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°27.024′S 148°53.064′E

6

East along the parallel 20°27.024′S to longitude 148°54.394′E

7

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°28.357′S 148°55.588′E

8

South along the meridian 148°55.588′E to latitude 20°29.980′S

9

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°31.356′S 148°57.123′E

10

South along the meridian 148°57.123′E to latitude 20°31.982′S

11

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°33.550′S 148°55.782′E

12

West along the parallel 20°33.550′S to longitude 148°53.342′E

13

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°32.545′S 148°52.601′E

14

West along the parallel 20°32.545′S to longitude 148°51.032′E

15

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°31.140′S 148°49.940′E

16

West along the parallel 20°31.140′S to longitude 148°48.657′E

17

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°29.855′S 148°47.595′E

18

North along the meridian 148°47.595′E to latitude 20°28.994′S

19

West along the parallel 20°28.994′S to longitude 148°46.721′E

20

South along the meridian 148°46.721′E to latitude 20°29.651′S

21

West along the parallel 20°29.651′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the parallel 20°29.651′S (at the point closest to 20°29.651′S 148°45.825′E)

22

North along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°45.825′E (at the point closest to 20°28.776′S 148°45.825′E)

23

Generally northeasterly then southeasterly then easterly then northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°26.760′S (at the point closest to 20°26.760′S 148°51.428′E)

24

North along the meridian 148°51.428′E to latitude 20°25.468′S

25

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°24.853′S 148°50.736′E

26

West along the parallel 20°24.853′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°24.853′S (at the point closest to 20°24.853′S 148°50.141′E)

27

Generally northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

 (2) However, the Puritan Bay, Round Head, Genesta Bay, Cape Conway, Defiance Island setting 4 (low use) area does not include the Cow and Calf Islands setting 5 (protected) area.

55  Rattray Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Rattray Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Rattray Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°58.509′S 148°32.365′E

2

East along the parallel 19°58.509′S to longitude 148°34.463′E

3

South along the meridian 148°34.463′E to latitude 20°00.727′S

4

West along the parallel 20°00.727′S to longitude 148°32.365′E

5

North along the meridian 148°32.365′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

56  Repulse Islands setting 4 (low use) area

  The Repulse Islands setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Repulse Islands setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°33.852′S 148°51.182′E

2

East along the parallel 20°33.852′S to longitude 148°52.176′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°35.352′S 148°53.780′E

4

South along the meridian 148°53.780′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°53.780′E (at the point closest to 20°37.115′S 148°53.780′E)

5

Westerly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°51.026′E (at the point closest to 20°37.826′S 148°51.026′E)

6

North along the meridian 148°51.026′E to latitude 20°35.563′S

7

West along the parallel 20°35.563′S to longitude 148°50.573′E

8

North along the meridian 148°50.573′E to latitude 20°34.492′S

9

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

57  Saddleback, Olden and Gumbrel Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area

  The Saddleback, Olden and Gumbrel Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Saddleback, Olden and Gumbrel Islands complex setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°02.574′S 148°31.160′E

2

East along the parallel 20°02.574′S to longitude 148°33.547′E

3

South along the meridian 148°33.547′E to latitude 20°03.147′S

4

East along the parallel 20°03.147′S to longitude 148°34.822′E

5

South along the meridian 148°34.822′E to latitude 20°05.260′S

6

East along the parallel 20°05.260′S to longitude 148°35.572′E

7

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°04.774′S 148°36.151′E

8

East along the parallel 20°04.774′S to longitude 148°37.676′E

9

South along the meridian 148°37.676′E to latitude 20°07.173′S

10

West along the parallel 20°07.173′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°07.173′S (at the point closest to 20°07.173′S 148°34.088′E)

11

Generally northwesterly then northerly then southwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°31.160′E (at the point closest to 20°05.418′S 148°31.160′E)

12

North along the meridian 148°31.160′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

58  South Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The South Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Molle Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.567′S 148°50.688′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.567′S to longitude 148°51.924′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.924′E to latitude 20°17.727′S

4

West along the parallel 20°17.727′S to longitude 148°50.409′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.056′E (at the point closest to 20°16.957′S 148°50.056′E)

6

Generally northeasterly then northerly then northeasterly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.863′E (at the point closest to 20°15.389′S 148°50.863′E)

7

Northerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

59  South‑west Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The Southwest Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Southwest Hook Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°07.361′S 148°52.127′E

2

East along the parallel 20°07.361′S to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°07.361′S (at the point closest to 20°07.361′S 148°53.048′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.949′E (at the point closest to 20°09.764′S 148°52.949′E)

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°10.506′S 148°52.365′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°10.190′S 148°52.127′E

6

North along the meridian 148°52.127′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

60  West Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

  The West Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

West Whitsunday Island setting 4 (low use) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°11.497′S 148°56.323′E

2

East along the parallel 20°11.497′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.497′S (at the point closest to 20°11.497′S 148°57.383′E)

3

Generally southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.249′S (at the point closest to 20°14.249′S 148°56.271′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°14.249′S to longitude 148°55.401′E

5

North along the meridian 148°55.401′E to latitude 20°13.261′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°12.518′S 148°56.323′E

7

North along the meridian 148°56.323′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

Part 5—Setting 5 (protected) areas

 

61  Cow and Calf Islands setting 5 (protected) area

  The Cow and Calf Islands setting 5 (protected) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cow and Calf Islands setting 5 (protected) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°24.853′S (at the point closest to 20°24.853′S 148°50.141′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°24.853′S to longitude 148°50.736′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°25.468′S 148°51.428′E

4

South along the meridian 148°51.428′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°26.760′S (at the point closest to 20°26.760′S 148°51.428′E)

5

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

62  Deloraine Island setting 5 (protected) area

  The Deloraine Island setting 5 (protected) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Deloraine Island setting 5 (protected) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°08.761′S 149°03.672′E

2

East along the parallel 20°08.761′S to longitude 149°04.862′E

3

South along the meridian 149°04.862′E to latitude 20°10.061′S

4

West along the parallel 20°10.061′S to longitude 149°03.672′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.672′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

63  Double Bay East setting 5 (protected) area

  The Double Bay East setting 5 (protected) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Bay East setting 5 (protected) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.602′S (at the point closest to 20°11.602′S 148°37.663′E)

2

Generally southeasterly then westerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°37.101′E (at the point closest to 20°12.966′S 148°37.101′E)

3

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

64  Eshelby Islands setting 5 (protected) area

  The Eshelby Islands setting 5 (protected) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Eshelby Islands setting 5 (protected) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°00.480′S 148°36.962′E

2

East along the parallel 20°00.480′S to longitude 148°38.400′E

3

South along the meridian 148°38.400′E to latitude 20°01.920′S

4

West along the parallel 20°01.920′S to longitude 148°36.962′

5

North along the meridian 148°36.962′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

65  Haslewood and Lupton Islands setting 5 (protected) area

  The Haslewood and Lupton Islands setting 5 (protected) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Haslewood and Lupton Islands setting 5 (protected) area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.994′S 149°06.177′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.994′S to longitude 149°06.296′E

3

South along the meridian 149°06.296′E to latitude 20°15.608′S

4

East along the parallel 20°15.608′S to longitude 149°06.779′E

5

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°16.358′S 149°07.036′E

6

South along the meridian 149°07.036′E to latitude 20°16.934′S

7

West along the parallel 20°16.934′S to longitude 149°06.834′E

8

South along the meridian 149°06.834′E to latitude 20°17.450′S

9

West along the parallel 20°17.450′S to longitude 149°05.748′E

10

South along the meridian 149°05.748′E to latitude 20°18.086′S

11

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.405′S 149°05.204′E

12

West along the parallel 20°18.405′S to longitude 149°05.100′E

13

North along the meridian 149°05.100′E to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.100′E (at the point closest to 20°18.348′S 149°05.100′E)

14

Generally northeasterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.177′E (at point closest to 20°15.057′S 149°06.177′E)

15

North along the meridian 149°06.177′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

66  Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 5 (protected) area

  The Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 5 (protected) area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island setting 5 (protected) area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.324′S (at the point closest to 20°14.324′S 149°01.539′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°14.324′S to longitude 149°01.866′E

3

South along the meridian 149°01.866′E to latitude 20°15.400′S

4

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°15.824′S 149°02.039′E

5

West along the parallel 20°15.824′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.824′S (at the point closest to 20°15.824′S 149°01.693′E)

6

Generally northerly then southwesterly then northeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the setting area.

 

Schedule 3—Locations

Note: See the definition of Location in Schedule 9.

 

 

1  Almora Islet Location

  The Almora Islet Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Almora Islet Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.657′S 148°45.805′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.657′S to longitude 148°46.524′E

3

South along the meridian 148°46.524′E to latitude 20°14.398′S

4

West along the parallel 20°14.398′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.398′S (at the point closest to 20°14.398′S 148°46.254′E)

5

Generally northerly then northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°45.805′E (at the point closest to 20°13.932′S 148°45.805′E)

6

North along the meridian 148°45.805′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

2  Anchorage Bay, Shaw Island Location

  The Anchorage Bay, Shaw Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Anchorage Bay, Shaw Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°28.639′S 149°03.806′E

2

East along the parallel 20°28.639′S to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°28.639′S (at the point closest to 20°28.639′S 149°04.160′E)

3

Generally southerly then southwesterly then northwesterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.277′E (at the point closest to 20°30.212′S 149°02.277′E)

4

North along the meridian 149°02.277′E to latitude 20°29.888′S

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°29.465′S 149°02.923′E

6

East along the parallel 20°29.465′S to longitude 149°03.609′E

7

North along the meridian 149°03.609′E to latitude 20°28.807′S

8

East along the parallel 20°28.807′S to longitude 149°03.806′E

9

North along the meridian 149°03.806′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

3  Andersons/Woodcutter Bays Location

  The Andersons/Woodcutter Bays Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Andersons/Woodcutter Bays Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.213′E (at the point closest to 20°21.996′S 148°50.213′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°21.996′S to longitude 148°50.451′E

3

South along the meridian 148°50.451′E to latitude 20°22.216′S

4

East along the parallel 20°22.216′S to longitude 148°50.616′E

5

South along the meridian 148°50.616′E to latitude 20°23.369′S

6

West along the parallel 20°23.369′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°23.369′S (at the point closest to 20°23.369′S 148°50.315′E)

7

Generally westerly then northeasterly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

4  Anne Island Location

  The Anne Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Anne Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°24.858′S 149°00.754′E

2

East along the parallel 20°24.858′S to longitude 149°01.346′E

3

South along the meridian 149°01.346′E to latitude 20°25.679′S

4

West along the parallel 20°25.679′S to longitude 149°00.754′E

5

North along the meridian 149°00.754′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

5  Apostle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Apostle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Apostle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.959′S (at the point closest to 20°12.959′S 148°59.841′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°12.959′S to longitude 149°00.223′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.223′E to latitude 20°13.639′S

4

East along the parallel 20°13.639′S to longitude 149°00.670′E

5

South along the meridian 149°00.670′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°00.670′E (at the point closest to 20°13.969′S 149°00.670′E)

6

Generally southwesterly then northeasterly then northerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

6  Armit Island Location

  The Armit Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Armit Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.264′S 148°38.419′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.264′S to longitude 148°39.912′E

3

South along the meridian 148°39.912′E to latitude 20°06.210′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.210′S to longitude 148°39.469′E

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°07.079′S 148°39.010′E

6

West along the parallel 20°07.079′S to longitude 148°38.419′E

7

North along the meridian 148°38.419′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

7  Armit Islets (No 1) Location

  The Armit Islets (No 1) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Armit Islets (No 1) Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.210′S 148°39.469′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.210′S to longitude 148°39.706′E

3

South along the meridian 148°39.706′E to latitude 20°07.079′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.079′S to longitude 148°39.010′E

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

8  Bait Reef Location

  The Bait Reef Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bait Reef Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°47.265′S 149°03.478′E

2

East along the parallel 19°47.265′S to longitude 149°05.342′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.342′E to latitude 19°49.574′S

4

West along the parallel 19°49.574′S to longitude 149°03.478′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.478′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

9  Bauer Bay, South Molle Island Location

  The Bauer Bay, South Molle Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bauer Bay, South Molle Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.153′S 148°50.224′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.153′S to longitude 148°50.956′E

3

South along the meridian 148°50.956′E to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.956′E (at the point closest to 20°15.402′S 148°50.956′E)

4

Generally southwesterly then northwesterly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline and the meridian 148°49.891′E (at the point closest to 20°15.279′S 148°49.891′E)

5

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°15.213′S 148°49.898′E

6

East along the parallel 20°15.213′S to longitude 148°50.224′E

7

North along the meridian to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

10  Baynham Island Location

  The Baynham Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Baynham Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°25.628′S 149°05.789′E

2

East along the parallel 20°25.628′S to longitude 149°06.525′E

3

South along the meridian 149°06.525′E to latitude 20°26.577′S

4

West along the parallel 20°26.577′S to longitude 149°05.789′E

5

North along the meridian 149°05.789′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

11  Beach 25, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Beach 25, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Beach 25, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.073′E (at the point closest to 20°18.466′S 148°57.073′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then southerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.662′S (at the point closest to 20°19.662′S 148°57.732′E)

3

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.734′S 148°56.854′E

4

North easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

12  Billbob Bay, Shaw Island Location

  The Billbob Bay, Shaw Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Billbob Bay, Shaw Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.889′E (at the point closest to 20°31.526′S 149°02.889′E)

2

Generally easterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.038′E (at the point closest to 20°31.628′S 149°04.038′E)

3

South along the meridian 149°04.038′E to latitude 20°31.900′S

4

West along the parallel 20°31.900′S to longitude 149°02.889′E

5

North along the meridian 149°02.889′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

13  Bird Island Location

  The Bird Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bird Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.267′S 148°51.893′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.267′S to longitude 148°53.268′E

3

South along the meridian 148°53.268′E to latitude 20°06.073′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.073′S to longitude 148°51.893′E

5

North along the meridian 148°51.893′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

14  Black Island Location

  The Black Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Black Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.438′S 148°53.268′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.438′S to longitude 148°53.916′E

3

South along the meridian 148°53.916′E to latitude 20°05.507′S

4

West along the parallel 20°05.507′S to longitude 148°53.268′E

5

North along the meridian 148°53.268′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

15  Blue Pearl Bay, Hayman Island Location

  The Blue Pearl Bay, Hayman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Blue Pearl Bay, Hayman Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°01.879′S 148°52.385′E

2

East along the parallel 20°01.879′S to longitude 148°52.850′E

3

South along the meridian 148°52.850′E to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.850′E (at the point closest to 20°02.188′S 148°52.850′E)

4

Generally southerly then westerly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°02.899′S (at the point closest to 20°02.899′S 148°52.687′E)

5

West along the parallel 20°02.899′S to longitude 148°52.385′E

6

North along the meridian 148°52.385′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

16  Bluff Bay Location

  The Bluff Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bluff Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°10.293′S 148°40.609′E

2

East along the parallel 20°10.293′S to longitude 148°40.956′E

3

South along the meridian 148°40.956′E to latitude 20°13.582′S

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°40.828′E (at the point closest to 20°13.582′S 148°40.828′E)

5

Generally northwesterly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°40.609′E (at the point closest to 20°10.544′S 148°40.609′E)

6

North along the meridian 148°40.609′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

17  Boat Port, Lindeman Island Location

  The Boat Port, Lindeman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Boat Port, Lindeman Island Location

Item

Description

1

Starting at the point 20°25.679′S 149°01.232′E

2

East along the parallel 20°25.679′S to longitude 149°02.064′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.064′E to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.064′E (at the point closest to 20°25.757′S 149°02.064′E)

4

Generally southerly then southwesterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°26.575′S (at the point closest to 20°26.575′S 149°01.460′E)

5

West along the parallel 20°26.575′S to longitude 149°01.232′E

6

North along the meridian 149°01.232′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

18  Border Island Location

  The Border Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Border Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°08.734′S 149°00.909′E

2

East along the parallel 20°08.734′S to longitude 149°02.995′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.995′E to latitude 20°11.308′S

4

West along the parallel 20°11.308′S to longitude 149°02.203′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°09.908′S 149°00.909′E

6

North along the meridian 149°00.909′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

19  Brush Island Location

  The Brush Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Brush Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°28.807′S 149°02.923′E

2

East along the parallel 20°28.807′S to longitude 149°03.609′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.609′E to latitude 20°29.465′S

4

West along the parallel 20°29.465′S to longitude 149°02.923′E

5

North along the meridian 149°02.923′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

20  Butterfly Bay/Maureen’s Cove, Hook Island Location

  The Butterfly Bay/Maureen’s Cove, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Butterfly Bay/Maureen’s Cove, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°03.361′S 148°55.330′E

2

East along the parallel 20°03.361′S to longitude 148°55.717′E

3

South along the meridian 148°55.717′E to latitude 20°03.808′S

4

East along the parallel 20°03.808′S to longitude 148°56.028′E

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°03.505′S 148°56.441′E

6

East along the parallel 20°03.505′S to longitude 148°56.564′E

7

South along the meridian 148°56.564′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.564′E (at the point closest to 20°03.817′S 148°56.564′E)

8

Generally southwesterly then northerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.330′E (at the point closest to 20°03.734′S 148°55.330′E)

9

North along the meridian 148°55.330′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

21  Calf Island Location

  The Calf Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Calf Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°25.517′S (at the point closest to 20°25.517′S 148°50.289′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°25.517′S to longitude 148°51.414′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.414′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°26.761′S (at the point closest to 20°26.761′S 148°51.414′E)

4

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

22  Cane Cocky’s Cove Location

  The Cane Cocky’s Cove Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cane Cocky’s Cove Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.764′S (at the point closest to 20°16.764′S 148°48.095′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°16.764′S to longitude 148°48.390′E

3

South along the meridian 148°48.390′E to latitude 20°17.130′S

4

West along the parallel 20°17.130′S to longitude 148°47.950′E

5

South along the meridian 148°47.950′E to latitude 20°17.404′S

6

West along the parallel 20°17.404′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.404′S (at the point closest to 20°17.404′S 148°47.656′E)

7

Generally northwesterly then northerly then north easterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

23  Cape Rock Location

  The Cape Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cape Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°32.307′S 148°55.232′E

2

East along the parallel 20°32.307′S to longitude 148°55.878′E

3

South along the meridian 148°55.878′E to latitude 20°32.801′S

4

West along the parallel 20°32.801′S to longitude 148°55.232′E

5

North along the meridian 148°55.232′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

24  Catseye Bay, Hamilton Island Location

  The Catseye Bay, Hamilton Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Catseye Bay, Hamilton Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.316′S (at the point closest to 20°20.316′S 148°57.439′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°20.316′S to longitude 148°58.562′E

3

South along the meridian 148°58.562′E to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°58.562′E (at the point closest to 20°20.645′S 148°58.562′E)

4

Generally westerly then northwesterly then northerly along the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

25  Chance Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Chance Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Chance Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.680′E (at the point closest to 20°18.644′S 149°02.680′E)

2

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.745′S 149°02.490′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.490′E to latitude 20°19.053′S

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.616′S 149°01.372′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.372′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.372′E (at the point closest to 20°19.346′S 149°01.372′E)

6

Generally northeasterly then southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

26  Chrome Rock Location

  The Chrome Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Chrome Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°27.894′S 149°03.323′E

2

East along the parallel 20°27.894′S to longitude 149°03.933′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.933′E to latitude 20°28.216′S

4

West along the parallel 20°28.216′S to longitude 149°03.806′E

5

South along the meridian 149°03.806′E to latitude 20°28.318′S

6

West along the parallel 20°28.318′S to longitude 149°03.323′E

7

North along the meridian 149°03.323′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

27  Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location

  The Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cid Harbour, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.249′S (at the point closest to 20°14.249′S 148°56.271′E)

2

Generally southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.531′E (at the point closest to 20°14.637′S 148°56.531′E)

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.974′S (at the point closest to 20°14.974′S 148°57.200′E)

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.755′S (at the point closest to 20°15.755′S 148°56.267′E)

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.411′S (at the point closest to 20°15.411′S 148°55.417′E)

6

Generally northwesterly along the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.171′E (at the point closest to 20°15.178′S 148°55.171′E)

7

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

28  Coconut Bay, Lindeman Island Location

  The Coconut Bay, Lindeman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Coconut Bay, Lindeman Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°26.575′S 149°01.232′E

2

East along the parallel 20°26.575′S to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°26.575′S (at the point closest to 20°26.575′S 149°01.460′E)

3

Generally southeasterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.648′S (at the point closest to 20°27.648′S 149°02.038′E)

4

South along the meridian 149°02.038′E to latitude 20°27.847′S

5

West along the parallel 20°27.847′S to longitude 149°01.817′E

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°26.722′S 149°01.232′E

7

North along the meridian 149°01.232′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

29  Cole Island Location

  The Cole Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cole Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°24.858′S 148°59.930′E

2

East along the parallel 20°24.858′S to longitude 149°00.754′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.754′E to latitude 20°25.896′S

4

West along the parallel 20°25.896′S to longitude 148°59.930′E

5

North along the meridian 148°59.930′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

30  Comston Island Location

  The Comston Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Comston Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°27.326′S 149°05.889′E

2

East along the parallel 20°27.326′S to longitude 149°06.948′E

3

South along the meridian 149°06.948′E to latitude 20°28.278′S

4

West along the parallel 20°28.278′S to longitude 149°05.889′E

5

North along the meridian 149°05.889′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

31  Cow Island Location

  The Cow Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cow Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°24.853′S (at the point closest to 20°24.853′S 148°50.141′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°24.853′S to longitude 148°51.180′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.180′E to latitude 20°25.517′S

4

West along the parallel 20°25.517′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°25.517′S (at the point closest to 20°25.517′S 148°50.289′E)

5

Generally northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

32  Daydream Island Location

  The Daydream Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Daydream Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.655′S 148°48.430′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.655′S to longitude 148°49.279′E

3

South along the meridian 148°49.279′E to latitude 20°16.038′S

4

West along the parallel 20°16.038′S to longitude 148°48.430′E

5

North along the meridian 148°48.430′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

33  Defiance Island Location

  The Defiance Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Defiance Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°29.833′S 148°48.695′E

2

East along the parallel 20°29.833′S to longitude 148°49.042′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°30.314′S 148°49.606′E

4

South along the meridian 148°49.606′E to latitude 20°30.600′S

5

West along the parallel 20°30.600′S to longitude 148°48.781′E

6

North along the meridian 148°48.781′E to latitude 20°30.239′S

7

West along the parallel 20°30.239′S to longitude 148°48.695′E

8

North along the meridian 148°48.695′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

34  Defiance Reefs Location

  The Defiance Reefs Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Defiance Reefs Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°30.239′S 148°48.082′E

2

East along the parallel 20°30.239′S to longitude 148°48.781′E

3

South along the meridian 148°48.781′E to latitude 20°30.600′S

4

East along the parallel 20°30.600′S to longitude 148°48.873′E

5

South along the meridian 148°48.873′E to latitude 20°31.195′S

6

West along the parallel 20°31.195′S to longitude 148°48.082′E

7

North along the meridian 148°48.082′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

35  Deloraine Island Location

  The Deloraine Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Deloraine Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°08.793′S 149°03.774′E

2

East along the parallel 20°08.793′S to longitude 149°04.829′E

3

South along the meridian 149°04.829′E to latitude 20°10.056′S

4

West along the parallel 20°10.056′S to longitude 149°03.774′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.774′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

36  Denman Island Location

  The Denman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Denman Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°16.548′S 148°50.798′E

2

East along the parallel 20°16.548′S to longitude 148°51.351′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.351′E to latitude 20°17.399′S

4

West along the parallel 20°17.399′S to longitude 148°50.647′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.647′E to latitude 20°17.039′S

6

East along the parallel 20°17.039′S to longitude 148°50.798′E

7

North along the meridian 148°50.798′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

37  Dent Island West Location

  The Dent Island West Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dent Island West Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.886′S 148°55.186′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.886′S to longitude 148°55.686′E

3

South along the meridian 148°55.686′E to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.686′E (at the point closest to 20°20.217′S 148°55.686′E)

4

Generally southwesterly then southerly then southeasterly along the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.355′E (at the point closest to 20°22.890′S 148°56.355′E)

5

South along the meridian 148°56.355′E to latitude 20°23.188′S

6

West along the parallel 20°23.188′S to longitude 148°55.186′E

7

North along the meridian 148°55.186′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

38  Dent Passage, Dent and Hamilton Islands Location

  The Dent Passage, Dent and Hamilton Islands Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dent Passage, Dent and Hamilton Islands Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.886′S 148°55.686′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.886′S to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.902′E (at the point closest to 20°19.886′S 148°56.902′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.179′E (at the point closest to 20°22.666′S 148°57.179′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°57.179′E to latitude 20°22.950′S

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°23.188′S 148°56.355′E

6

North along the meridian 148°56.355′E to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.355′E (at the point closest to 20°22.890′S148°56.355′E)

7

Generally northerly then westerly along the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.686′E (at the point closest to 20°20.217′S 148°55.686′E)

8

North along the meridian 148°55.686′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

39  Dingo Beach Location

  The Dingo Beach Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dingo Beach Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.357′S 148°29.577′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.357′S to longitude 148°30.093′E

3

South along the meridian 148°30.093′E to latitude 20°04.924′S

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°30.417′E (at the point closest to 20°05.250′S 148°30.417′E)

5

Generally southwesterly then northwesterly along the mainland and Blackcurrant Island (20010b) coastlines at mean low water to the intersection of the Blackcurrant Island (20010b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°29.577′E (at the point closest to 20°04.701′S 148°29.577′E)

6

North along the meridian 148°29.577′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

40  Double Bay East Location

  The Double Bay East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Bay East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.939′S 148°38.318′E

2

South along the meridian 148°38.318′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°38.318′E (at the point closest to 20°10.207′S 148°38.318′E)

3

Generally southerly then westerly then northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°37.204′E (at the point closest to 20°10.615′S 148°37.204′E)

4

North along the meridian 148°37.204′E to latitude 20°10.345′S

5

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

41  Double Bay West Location

  The Double Bay West Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Bay West Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.651′S 148°35.878′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°10.345′S 148°37.204′E

3

South along the meridian 148°37.204′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 20°10.615′S (at the point closest to 20°10.615′S 148°37.204′E)

4

Generally southwesterly then northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°35.878′E (at the point closest to 20°09.924′S 148°35.878′E)

5

North along the meridian 148°35.878′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

42  Double Cone Island Location

  The Double Cone Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Cone Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.742′S 148°42.147′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.742′S to longitude 148°43.782′E

3

South along the meridian 148°43.782′E to latitude 20°07.197′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.197′S to longitude 148°42.147′E

5

North along the meridian 148°42.147′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

43  Double Rocks Location

  The Double Rocks Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Rocks Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.018′S 148°58.187′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.018′S to longitude 148°58.811′E

3

South along the meridian 148°58.811′E to latitude 20°04.609′S

4

West along the parallel 20°04.609′S to longitude 148°58.187′E

5

North along the meridian 148°58.187′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

44  Driftwood Bay, Hamilton Island Location

  The Driftwood Bay, Hamilton Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Driftwood Bay, Hamilton Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°58.575′E (at the point closest to 20°21.921′S 148°58.575′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°58.575′E to latitude 20°22.216′S

3

West along the parallel 20°22.216′S to longitude 148°57.530′E

4

South along the meridian 148°57.530′E to latitude 20°22.950′S

5

West along the parallel 20°22.950′S to longitude 148°57.179′E

6

North along the meridian 148°57.179′E to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.179′E (at the point closest to 20°22.666′S 148°57.179′E)

7

Generally northeasterly then southerly then easterly along the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

45  Dugong Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Dugong Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dugong Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.530′E (at the point closest to 20°14.637′S 148°56.530′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then southwesterly then easterly then southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.974′S (at the point closest to 20°14.974′S 148°57.200′E)

3

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

46  Dumbell Island Location

  The Dumbell Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dumbell Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.908′S 148°59.976′E

2

East along the parallel 20°09.908′S to longitude 149°00.909′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°10.106′S 149°01.091′E

4

South along the meridian 149°01.091′E to latitude 20°10.859′S

5

West along the parallel 20°10.859′S to longitude 148°59.976′E

6

North along the meridian 148°59.976′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

47  Dungurra Island Location

  The Dungurra Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dungurra Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°21.171′S 148°59.904′E

2

East along the parallel 20°21.171′S to longitude 149°00.319′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.319′E to latitude 20°21.923′S

4

West along the parallel 20°21.923′S to longitude 148°59.565′E

5

North along the meridian 148°59.565′E to latitude 20°21.729′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

48  Earlando Coast Location

  The Earlando Coast Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Earlando Coast Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°08.443′S (at the point closest to 20°08.443′S 148°34.727′E)

2

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.238′S (at the point closest to 20°09.238′S 148°34.581′E)

3

Generally westerly then northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

49  East Repulse Island Location

  The East Repulse Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Repulse Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°35.063′S 148°52.350′E

2

East along the parallel 20°35.063′S to longitude 148°53.323′E

3

South along the meridian 148°53.323′E to latitude 20°36.686′S

4

West along the parallel 20°36.686′S to longitude 148°52.991′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°36.099′S 148°52.210′E

6

North along the meridian 148°52.210′E to latitude 20°35.386′S

7

East along the parallel 20°35.386′S to longitude 148°52.350′E

8

North along the meridian 148°52.350′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

50  East Rock Location

  The East Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.825′S 148°51.502′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.825′S to longitude 148°51.977′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.977′E to latitude 20°20.480′S

4

West along the parallel 20°20.480′S to longitude 148°51.502′E

5

North along the meridian 148°51.502′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

51  Edward Island Location

  The Edward Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Edward Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.217′S 149°10.028′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.217′S to longitude 149°11.011′E

3

South along the meridian 149°11.011′E to latitude 20°15.492′S

4

West along the parallel 20°15.492′S to longitude 149°09.741′E

5

North along the meridian 149°09.741′E to latitude 20°14.576′S

6

East along the parallel 20°14.576′S to longitude 149°10.028′E

7

North along the meridian 149°10.028′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

52  Edwin Rock Location

  The Edwin Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Edwin Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°07.240′S 148°36.396′E

2

East along the parallel 20°07.240′S to longitude 148°37.061′E

3

South along the meridian 148°37.061′E to latitude 20°07.954′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.954′S to longitude 148°36.586′E

5

North along the meridian 148°36.586′E to latitude 20°07.473′S

6

West along the parallel 20°07.473′S to longitude 148°36.396′E

7

North along the meridian 148°36.396′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

53  Eshelby Islands Location

  The Eshelby Islands Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Eshelby Islands Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°00.480′S 148°36.962′E

2

East along the parallel 20°00.480′S to longitude 148°38.400′E

3

South along the meridian 148°38.400′E to latitude 20°01.920′S

4

West along the parallel 20°01.920′S to longitude 148°36.962′E

5

North along the meridian 148°36.962′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

54  Esk Island Location

  The Esk Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Esk Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.587′S 149°01.991′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.587′S to longitude 149°03.021′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.021′E to latitude 20°14.472′S

4

West along the parallel 20°14.472′S to longitude 149°01.991′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.991′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

55  Fairlight Rock Location

  The Fairlight Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Fairlight Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°32.625′S 149°07.754′E

2

East along the parallel 20°32.625′S to longitude 149°08.302′E

3

South along the meridian 149°08.302′E to latitude 20°33.256′S

4

West along the parallel 20°33.256′S to longitude 149°07.754′E

5

North along the meridian 149°07.754′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

56  Fish and Palm Bays, Long Island Location

  The Fish and Palm Bays, Long Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Fish and Palm Bays, Long Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°20.121′S 148°50.382′E

2

East along the parallel 20°20.121′S to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.121′S (at the point closest to 20°20.121′S 148°50.652′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.270′S (at the point closest to 20°21.270′S 148°50.773′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°21.270′S to longitude 148°50.602′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.602′E to latitude 20°20.945′S

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°20.665′S 148°50.382′E

7

North along the meridian 148°50.382′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

57  Fitzalan Island Location

  The Fitzalan Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Fitzalan Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.662′S 148°57.218′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.662′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.662′S (at the point closest to 20°19.662′S 148°57.732′E)

3

Generally southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.806′E (at the point closest to 20°19.728′S 148°57.806′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°57.806′E to latitude 20°20.100′S

5

West along the parallel 20°20.100′S to longitude 148°57.570′E

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.841′S 148°57.218′E

7

North along the meridian 148°57.218′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

58  Fitzalan Passage, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Fitzalan Passage, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Fitzalan Passage, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°18.734′S 148°55.950′E

2

East along the parallel 20°18.734′S to longitude 148°56.854′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.662′S (at the point closest to 20°19.662′S 148°57.732′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°19.662′S to longitude 148°57.218′E

5

South along the meridian 148°57.218′E to latitude 20°19.841′S

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.588′S 148°56.875′E

7

West along the parallel 20°19.588′S to longitude 148°56.585′E

8

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

59  Funnel Bay Location

  The Funnel Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Funnel Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.657′S 148°44.951′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.657′S to longitude 148°45.108′E

3

South along the meridian 148°45.108′E to latitude 20°13.758′S

4

East along the parallel 20°13.758′S to longitude 148°45.805′E

5

South along the meridian 148°45.805′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°45.805′E (at the point closest to 20°13.932′S 148°45.805′E)

6

Generally westerly then southerly then northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.217′S (at the point closest to 20°15.217′S 148°44.017′E)

7

North along the meridian 148°44.017′E to latitude 20°14.917′S

8

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

60  Gap Beach, Lindeman Island Location

  The Gap Beach, Lindeman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Gap Beach, Lindeman Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°25.679′S 149°02.064′E

2

East along the parallel 20°25.679′S to longitude 149°03.189′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.189′E to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.189′E (at the point closest to 20°26.165′S 149°03.189′E)

4

Generally westerly then northerly then northwesterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.064′E (at the point closest to 20°25.757′S 149°02.064′E)

5

North along the meridian 149°02.064′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

61  Genesta Bay Location

  The Genesta Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Genesta Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°28.713′S (at the point closest to 20°28.713′S 148°54.720′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°28.713′S to longitude 148°55.013′E

3

South along the meridian 148°55.013′E to latitude 20°30.290′S

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°31.340′S 148°56.299′E

5

West along the parallel 20°31.340′S to longitude 148°56.005′E

6

South along the meridian 148°56.005′E to latitude 20°31.889′S

7

East along the parallel 20°31.889′S to longitude 148°56.551′E

8

South along the meridian 148°56.551′E to latitude 20°32.199′S

9

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°32.421′S 148°55.878′E

10

North along the meridian 148°55.878′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°32.128′S (at the point closest to 20°32.128′S 148°55.878′E)

11

Generally northwesterly then northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

62  Gloucester Island Location

  The Gloucester Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Gloucester Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°25.742′E (at the point closest to 19°58.011′S 148°25.742′E)

2

East along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°28.973′E (at the point closest to 19°58.006′S to longitude 148°28.973′E)

3

South along the meridian 148°28.973′E to latitude 20°03.578′S

4

West along the parallel 20°03.578′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the parallel 20°03.578′S (at the point closest to 20°03.578′S 148°27.144′E)

5

Northwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°25.742′E (at the point closest to 20°02.668′S 148°25.742′E)

6

North along the meridian 148°25.742′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

63  Grassy Island Location

  The Grassy Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Grassy Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point of 20°07.954′S 148°35.675′E

2

East along the parallel 20°07.954′S to longitude 148°35.940′E

3

South along the meridian 148°35.940′E to latitude 20°08.526′S

4

Northeasterly along to geodesic to 20°08.069′S 148°36.585′E

5

North along the meridian 148°36.585′E to latitude 20°07.954′S

6

East along the parallel 20°07.954′S to longitude 148°37.169′E

7

South along the meridian 148°37.169′E to latitude 20°09.651′S

8

West along the parallel 20°09.651′S to longitude 148°35.675′E

9

North along the meridian 148°35.675′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

64  Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Gulnare Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.240′E (at the point closest to 20°18.438′S 148°56.240′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.073′E (at the point closest to 20°18.466′S 148°57.073′E)

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.734′S 148°56.854′E

4

West along the parallel 20°18.734′S to longitude 148°56.240′E

5

North along the meridian 148°56.240′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

65  Gumbrell Island Location

  The Gumbrell Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Gumbrell Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.315′S 148°35.876′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.315′S to longitude 148°37.101′E

3

South along the meridian 148°37.101′E to latitude 20°06.410′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.410′S to longitude 148°35.876′E

5

North along the meridian 148°35.876′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

66  Hamilton Island East Location

  The Hamilton Island East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hamilton Island East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.588′S 148°56.585′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.588′S to longitude 148°56.875′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°20.100′S 148°57.570′E

4

East along the parallel 20°20.100′S to longitude 148°59.132′E

5

South along the meridian 148°59.132′E to latitude 20°22.216′S

6

West along the parallel 20°22.216′S to longitude 148°58.575′E

7

North along the meridian 148°58.575′E to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°58.575′E (at the point closest to 20°21.921′S 148°58.575′E)

8

Generally northerly along the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°58.562′E (at the point closest to 20°20.645′S 148°58.562′E)

9

North along the meridian 148°58.562′E to latitude 20°20.316′S

10

West along the parallel 20°20.316′S to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.316′S (at the point closest to 20°20.316′S 148°57.439′E)

11

Generally northwesterly along the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.902′E (at the point closest to 20°19.886′S 148°56.902′E)

12

West along the parallel 20°19.886′S to longitude 148°56.585′E

13

North along the meridian 148°56.585′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

67  Happy Bay, Long Island Location

  The Happy Bay, Long Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Happy Bay, Long Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.183′S 148°50.382′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.183′S to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.183′S (at the point closest to 20°19.183′S 148°50.854′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.121′S (at the point closest to 20°20.121′S 148°50.652′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°20.121′S to longitude 148°50.382′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.382′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

68  Hardy Reef Location

  The Hardy Reef Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hardy Reef Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°43.001′S 149°12.412′E

2

East along the parallel 19°43.001′S to longitude 149°17.071′E

3

South along the meridian 149°17.071′E to latitude 19°48.721′S

4

West along the parallel 19°48.721′S to longitude 149°15.546′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19°47.814′S 149°14.990′E

6

Northerly along the geodesic to 19°47.036′S 149°14.694′E

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19°46.733′S 149°14.454′E

8

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19°46.380′S 149°13.748′E

9

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19°45.937′S 149°12.948′E

10

Westerly along the geodesic to 19°45.809′S 149°12.545′E

11

Westerly along the geodesic to 19°45.766′S 149°11.541′E

12

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19°45.570′S 149°11.121′E

13

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 19°45.223′S 149°10.885′E

14

North along the meridian 149°10.885′E to latitude 19°44.752′S

15

Northerly along the geodesic to 19°44.040′S 149°10.745′E

16

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 19°43.612′S 149°11.175′E

17

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 19°43.385′S 149°11.680′E

18

East along the parallel 19°43.385′S to longitude 149°12.098′E

19

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 19°43.214′S 149°12.412′E

20

North along the meridian 149°12.412′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

69  Harold Island Location

  The Harold Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Harold Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.924′S 149°08.779′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.924′S to longitude 149°09.268′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°14.576′S 149°09.741′E

4

South along the meridian 149°09.741′E to latitude 20°14.959′S

5

West along the parallel 20°14.959′S to longitude 149°08.689′E

6

North along the meridian 149°08.689′E to latitude 20°14.392′S

7

East along the parallel 20°14.392′S to longitude 149°08.779′E

8

North along the meridian 149°08.779′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

70  Haslewood Island South Location

  The Haslewood Island South Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Haslewood Island South Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.268′E (at the point closest to 20°18.109′S 149°05.268′E)

2

South along the meridian 149°05.268′E to latitude 20°18.898′S

3

West along the parallel 20°18.898′S to longitude 149°04.593′E

4

North along the meridian 149°04.593′E to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.593′E (at the point closest to 20°18.174′S 149°04.593′E)

5

Generally northeasterly then southerly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

71  Hayman Island East Location

  The Hayman Island East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hayman Island East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°01.879′S 148°52.850′E

2

East along the parallel 20°01.879′S to longitude 148°53.219′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°03.147′S 148°54.517′E

4

South along the meridian 148°54.517′E to latitude 20°03.782′S

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°04.438′S 148°53.916′E

6

West along the parallel 20°04.438′S to longitude 148°53.658′E

7

North along the meridian 148°53.658′E to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.658′E (at the point closest to 20°03.798′S 148°53.658′E)

8

Generally northerly then northwesterly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.850′E (at the point closest to 20°02.188′S 148°52.850′E)

9

North along the meridian 148°52.850′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

72  Hayman Island Resort Location

  The Hayman Island Resort Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hayman Island Resort Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°02.899′S 148°52.385′E

2

East along the parallel 20°02.899′S to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°02.899′S (at the point closest to 20°02.899′S 148°52.687′E)

3

Generally southerly then easterly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.658′E (at the point closest to 20°03.798′S 148°53.658′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°53.658′E to latitude 20°04.438′S

5

West along the parallel 20°04.438′S to longitude 148°53.268′E

6

North along the meridian 148°53.268′E to latitude 20°04.368′S

7

West along the parallel 20°04.368′S to longitude 148°52.042′E

8

North along the meridian 148°52.042′E to latitude 20°03.207′S

9

East along the parallel 20°03.207′S to longitude 148°52.385′E

10

North along the meridian 148°52.385′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

73  Henning Island Location

  The Henning Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Henning Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°18.352′S 148°54.847′E

2

East along the parallel 20°18.352′S to longitude 148°55.667′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°19.588′S 148°56.585′E

4

South along the meridian 148°56.585′E to latitude 20°19.886′S

5

West along the parallel 20°19.886′S to longitude 148°54.847′E

6

North along the meridian 148°54.847′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

74  Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hill Inlet, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.808′S 149°01.563′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.807′S to longitude 149°01.991′E

3

South along the meridian 149°01.991′E to latitude 20°15.400′S

4

West along the parallel 20°15.400′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.400′S (at the point closest to 20°15.400′S 149°01.519′E)

5

Generally southwesterly then north easterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.563′E (at the point closest to 20°14.134′S 149°01.563′E)

6

North along the meridian 149°01.563′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

75  Homestead Bay, Cid Island Location

  The Homestead Bay, Cid Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Homestead Bay, Cid Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.328′S 148°54.125′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.328′S to longitude 148°54.373′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.477′S (at the point closest to 20°15.477′S 148°54.527′E)

4

Generally southeasterly then southwesterly along the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.144′S (at the point closest to 20°16.144′S 148°54.332′E)

5

West along the parallel 20°16.144′S to longitude 148°54.005′E

6

North along the meridian 148°54.005′E to latitude 20°15.477′S

7

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

76  Hook Island Reef (No 1) Location

  The Hook Island Reef (No 1) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hook Island Reef (No 1) Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°06.858′S (at the point closest to 20°06.858′S 148°56.556′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°06.858′S to longitude 148°57.151′E

3

South along the meridian 148°57.151′E to latitude 20°09.040′S

4

East along the parallel 20°09.040′S to longitude 148°57.372′E

5

South along the meridian 148°57.372′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.372′E (at the point closest to 20°09.445′S 148°57.372′E)

6

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.392′S (at the point closest to 20°09.392′S 148°57.139′E)

7

Generally northerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

77  Hook Island Reef (No 2) Location

  The Hook Island Reef (No 2) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hook Island Reef (No 2) Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.392′S (at the point closest to 20°09.392′S 148°57.139′E)

2

Easterly along the geodesic to 20°09.421′S 148°57.268′E

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°09.846′S 148°57.107′E

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°11.100′S 148°56.158′E

5

West along the parallel 20°11.100′S to longitude 148°55.929′E

6

North along the meridian 148°55.929′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.929′E (at the point closest to 20°10.725′S 148°55.929′E)

7

Generally northeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

78  Hook Island Reef (No 5) Location

  The Hook Island Reef (No 5) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hook Island Reef (No 5) Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.635′S 148°53.033′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.635′S to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.385′E (at the point closest to 20°06.635′S 148°53.385′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.764′S (at the point closest to 20°09.764′S 148°52.949′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°09.764′S to longitude 148°52.599′E

5

North along the meridian 148°52.599′E to latitude 20°07.297′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

79  Hook Reef Location

  The Hook Reef Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hook Reef Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°43.888′S 149°10.211′E

2

Easterly along the geodesic to 19°44.040′S 149°10.745′E

3

Southerly along the geodesic to 19°44.752′S 149°10.885′E

4

South along the meridian 149°10.885′E to latitude 19°45.223′S

5

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°45.570′S 149°11.121′E

6

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°45.766′S 149°11.541′E

7

Easterly along the geodesic to 19°45.809′S 149°12.545′E

8

Easterly along the geodesic to 19°45.937′S 149°12.948′E

9

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°46.380′S 149°13.748′E

10

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°46.733′S 149°14.454′E

11

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°47.036′S 149°14.694′E

12

Southerly along the geodesic to 19°47.814′S 149°14.990′E

13

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°48.721′S 149°15.546′E

14

South along the meridian 149°15.546′E to latitude 19°50.388′S

15

West along the parallel 19°50.388′S to longitude 149°05.980′E

16

North along the meridian 149°05.980′E to latitude 19°44.439′S

17

East along the parallel 19°44.439′S to longitude 149°08.905′E

18

Easterly along the geodesic to 19°44.277′S 149°09.626′E

19

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 19°43.938′S 149°09.914′E

20

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

80  Hunt Channel, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location

  The Hunt Channel, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hunt Channel, Cid and Whitsunday Islands Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.411′S (at the point closest to 20°15.411′S 148°55.417′E)

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.267′E (at the point closest to 20°15.755′S 148°56.267′E)

3

Generally southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.927′S (at the point closest to 20°16.927′S 148°54.750′E)

4

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°54.517′E (at the point closest to 20°16.525′S 148°54.517′E)

5

Generally northeasterly then northerly along the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

81  Ireby Island Location

  The Ireby Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Ireby Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.253′S 149°08.157′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.253′S to longitude 149°08.947′E

3

South along the meridian 149°08.947′E to latitude 20°13.826′S

4

West along the parallel 20°13.826′S to longitude 149°08.157′E

5

North along the meridian 149°08.157′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

82  Jester Rock Location

  The Jester Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Jester Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°08.310′S 149°03.999′E

2

East along the parallel 20°08.310′S to longitude 149°04.643′E

3

South along the meridian 149°04.643′E to latitude 20°08.793′S

4

West along the parallel 20°08.793′S to longitude 149°03.999′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.999′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

83  Keyser Island Location

  The Keyser Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Keyser Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°30.692′S 149°04.449′E

2

East along the parallel 20°30.692′S to longitude 149°05.784′E

5

South along the meridian 149°05.784′E to latitude 20°31.683′S

6

West along the parallel 20°31.683′S to longitude 149°04.449′E

7

North along the meridian 149°04.449′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

84  Lagoon Rock Location

  The Lagoon Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Lagoon Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.639′S 149°02.166′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.639′S to longitude 149°02.860′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.860′E to latitude 20°16.347′S

4

West along the parallel 20°16.347′S to longitude 149°02.295′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°16.053′S 149°02.166′E

6

North along the meridian 149°02.166′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

85  Langford Island/Spit Location

  The Langford Island/Spit Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Langford Island/Spit Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.368′S 148°51.893′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.368′S to longitude 148°53.268′E

3

South along the meridian 148°53.268′E to latitude 20°05.267′S

4

West along the parallel 20°05.267′S to longitude 148°51.893′E

5

North along the meridian 148°51.893′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

86  Lindeman Island East Location

  The Lindeman Island East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Lindeman Island East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°25.679′S 149°03.190′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°27.072′S 149°04.298′E

3

West along the parallel 20°27.072′S to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.072′S (at the point closest to 20°27.072′S 149°03.920′E)

4

Generally northwesterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.189′E (at the point closest to 20°26.165′S 149°03.189′E)

5

North along the meridian 149°03.189′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

87  Line Reef Location

  The Line Reef Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Line Reef Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°36.864′S 149°08.169′E

2

East along the parallel 19°36.864′S to longitude 149°13.555′E

3

South along the meridian 149°13.555′E to latitude 19°43.001′S

4

West along the parallel 19°43.001′S to longitude 149°12.412′E

5

North along the meridian 149°12.412′E to latitude 19°42.671′S

6

West along the parallel 19°42.671′S to longitude 149°11.984′E

7

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 19°43.114′S 149°11.680′E

8

South along the meridian 149°11.680′E to latitude 19°43.385′S

9

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 19°43.612′S 149°11.175′E

10

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 19°44.040′S 149°10.745′E

11

Westerly along the geodesic to 19°43.888′S 149°10.211′E

12

Westerly along the geodesic to 19°43.938′S 149°09.914′E

13

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 19°44.277′S 149°09.626′E

14

Westerly along the geodesic to 19°44.439′S 149°08.905′E

15

West along the parallel 19°44.439′S to longitude 149°08.169′E

16

North along the meridian 149°08.169′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

88  Little Grassy Island Location

  The Little Grassy Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Little Grassy Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°07.473′S 148°35.940′E

2

East along the parallel 20°07.473′S to longitude 148°36.585′E

3

South along the meridian 148°36.585′E to latitude 20°08.069′S

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°08.526′S 148°35.940′E

5

North along the meridian 148°35.940′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

89  Little Lindeman Island Location

  The Little Lindeman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Little Lindeman Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°24.987′S 149°01.346′E

2

East along the parallel 20°24.987′S to longitude 149°02.580′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.580′E to latitude 20°25.679′S

4

West along the parallel 20°25.679′S to longitude 149°01.346′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.346′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

90  Long Island Reef (No 6/No 7) Location

  The Long Island Reef (No 6/No 7) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Long Island Reef (No 6/No 7) Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.832′S (at the point closest to 20°21.832′S 148°51.804′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°21.832′S to longitude 148°52.530′E

3

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°22.798′S 148°52.829′E

4

South along the meridian 148°52.829′E to latitude 20°24.100′S

5

West along the parallel 20°24.100′S to longitude 148°52.046′E

6

North along the meridian 148°52.046′E to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.046′E (at the point closest to 20°23.765′S 148°52.046′E)

7

Generally northeasterly then northwesterly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

91  Long Rock Location

  The Long Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Long Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°31.683′S 149°04.863′E

2

East along the parallel 20°31.683′S to longitude 149°05.625′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.625′E to latitude 20°32.476′S

4

West along the parallel 20°32.476′S to longitude 149°04.863′E

5

North along the meridian 149°04.863′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

92  Low Island Location

  The Low Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Low Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°08.322′S (at the point closest to 20°08.322′S 148°34.709′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°08.322′S to longitude 148°35.212′E

3

South along the meridian 148°35.212′E to latitude 20°09.238′S

4

West along the parallel 20°09.238′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.238′S (at the point closest to 20°09.238′S 148°34.581′E)

5

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°08.443′S (at the point closest to 20°08.443′S 148°34.727′E)

6

Generally northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

93  Low Rock Location

  The Low Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Low Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.130′S 148°47.950′E

2

East along the parallel 20°17.130′S to longitude 148°48.390′E

3

South along the meridian 148°48.390′E to latitude 20°17.404′S

4

West along the parallel 20°17.404′S to longitude 148°47.950′E

5

North along the meridian 148°47.950′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

94  Luncheon, Manta Ray and Pinnacle Bays, Hook Island Location

  The Luncheon, Manta Ray and Pinnacle Bays, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Luncheon, Manta Ray and Pinnacle Bays, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°03.268′S 148°57.288′E

2

East along the parallel 20°03.268′S to longitude 148°57.837′E

3

South along the meridian 148°57.837′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.837′E (at the point closest to 20°03.671′S 148°57.837′E)

4

Generally westerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.564′E (at the point closest to 20°03.817′S 148°56.564′E)

5

North along the meridian 148°56.564′E to latitude 20°03.505′S

6

East along the parallel 20°03.505′S to longitude 148°56.971′E

7

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

95  Lupton Island East Location

  The Lupton Island East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Lupton Island East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.787′S 149°06.177′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.787′S to longitude 149°07.036′E

3

South along the meridian 149°07.036′E to latitude 20°17.632′S

4

West along the parallel 20°17.632′S to longitude 149°06.650′E

5

North along the meridian 149°06.650′E to the intersection of the Lupton Island (20078b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.650′E (at the point closest to 20°17.362′S 149°06.650′E)

6

Generally northerly then westerly then northerly along the Lupton Island (20078b) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lupton Island (20078b) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.153′S (at the point closest to 20°16.153′S 149°06.168′E)

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.081′S (at the point closest to 20°16.081′S 149°06.057′E)

8

Generally northerly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.177′E (at the point closest to 20°15.057′S 149°06.177′E)

9

North along the meridian 149°06.177′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

96  Mackerel Bay, Hook Island Location

  The Mackerel Bay, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Mackerel Bay, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°04.316′S (at the point closest to 20°04.316′S 148°58.026′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°58.026′E to latitude 20°04.606′S

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°05.646′S (at the point closest to 20°05.646′S 148°57.517′E)

4

Generally westerly then northeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

97  Macona Inlet, Hook Island Location

  The Macona Inlet, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Macona Inlet, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°54.903′E (at the point closest to 20°10.520′S 148°54.903′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then southerly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.929′E (at the point closest to 20°10.725′S 148°55.929′E)

3

South along the meridian 148°55.929′E to latitude 20°11.100′S

4

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°10.845′S 148°54.903′E

5

North along the meridian 148°54.903′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

98  Maher Island East Location

  The Maher Island East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Maher Island East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°24.767′S 149°05.606′E

2

East along the parallel 20°24.767′S to longitude 149°05.906′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.906′E to latitude 20°25.628′S

4

West along the parallel 20°25.628′S to longitude 149°05.789′E

5

South along the meridian 149°05.789′E to latitude 20°26.065′S

6

West along the parallel 20°26.065′S to longitude 149°04.985′E

7

North along the meridian 149°04.985′E to the intersection of the Maher Island (20405) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.985′E (at the point closest to 20°26.022′S 149°04.985′E)

8

Generally northeasterly along the Maher Island (20405) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Maher Island (20405) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.606′E (at the point closest to 20°25.019′S 149°05.606′E)

9

North along the meridian 149°05.606′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

99  Maher Island West Location

  The Maher Island West Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Maher Island West Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°24.767′S 149°04.287′E

2

East along the parallel 20°24.767′S to longitude 149°05.606′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.606′E to the intersection of the Maher Island (20405) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.606′E (at the point closest to 20°25.019′S 149°05.606′E)

4

Generally southerly then westerly then southwesterly along the Maher Island (20405) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Maher Island (20405) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.985′E (at the point closest to 20°26.022′S 149°04.985′E)

5

South along the meridian 149°04.985′E to latitude 20°26.065′S

6

West along the parallel 20°26.065′S to longitude 149°04.287′E

7

North along the meridian 149°04.287′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

100  Mansell Island Location

  The Mansell Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Mansell Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°27.537′S 149°06.948′E

2

East along the parallel 20°27.537′S to longitude 149°08.353′E

3

South along the meridian 149°08.353′E to latitude 20°29.244′S

4

West along the parallel 20°29.244′S to longitude 149°07.046′E

5

North along the meridian 149°07.046′E to latitude 20°28.826′S

6

West along the parallel 20°28.826′S to longitude 149°06.948′E

7

North along the meridian 149°06.948′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

101  Martin Islet, Haslewood Island Location

  The Martin Islet, Haslewood Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Martin Islet, Haslewood Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°16.791′S 149°03.782′E

2

East along the parallel 20°16.791′S to longitude 149°04.125′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.057′S (at the point closest to 20°17.057′S 149°04.306′E)

4

Generally southerly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.679′S (at the point closest to 20°17.679′S 149°04.164′E)

5

West along the parallel 20°17.679′S to longitude 149°03.782′E

6

North along the meridian 149°03.782′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

102  May’s Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The May’s Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

May’s Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.114′S 148°56.537′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.114′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°13.114′S (at the point closest to 20°13.114′S 148°56.913′E)

3

Generally southwesterly then northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.429′E (at the point closest to 20°13.510′S 148°56.429′E)

4

North along the meridian 148°56.429′E to latitude 20°13.223′S

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

103  Mid Molle Island Location

  The Mid Molle Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Mid Molle Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.655′S 148°49.279′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.655′S to longitude 148°50.224′E

3

South along the meridian 148°50.224′E to latitude 20°15.213′S

4

West along the parallel 20°15.153′S to longitude 148°49.279′E

5

North along the meridian 148°49.279′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

104  Middle Island Location

  The Middle Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Middle Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°58.685′S 148°21.275′E

2

East along the parallel 19°58.685′S to longitude 148°22.542′E

3

South along the meridian 148°22.542′E to latitude 19°59.735′S

4

West along the parallel 19°59.735′S to longitude 148°21.275′E

5

North along the meridian 148°21.275′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

105  Moon Island Location

  The Moon Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Moon Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°18.610′S (at the point closest to 20°18.610′S 149°02.851′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°18.610′S to longitude 149°03.130′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.130′E to latitude 20°19.196′S

4

West along the parallel 20°19.196′S to longitude 149°02.490′E

5

North along the meridian 149°02.490′E to latitude 20°18.745′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.680′E (at the point closest to 20°18.644′S 149°02.680′E)

7

Generally easterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

106  Nara Inlet, Hook Island Location

  The Nara Inlet, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Nara Inlet, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°54.147′E (at the point closest to 20°09.986′S 148°54.147′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°54.147′E to latitude 20°10.297′S

3

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°10.489′S 148°53.288′E

4

North along the meridian 148°53.288′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.288′E (at the point closest to 20°10.193′S 148°53.288′E)

5

Generally northeasterly then southwesterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

107  Neck Bay East, Shaw Island Location

  The Neck Bay East, Shaw Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Neck Bay East, Shaw Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.225′S (at the point closest to 20°27.225′S 149°05.358′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°27.225′S to longitude 149°05.731′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.731′E to latitude 20°27.749′S

4

West along the parallel 20°27.749′S to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.749′S (at the point closest to 20°27.749′S 149°05.375′E)

5

Generally northwesterly then northeasterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

108  Neck Bay West, Shaw Island Location

  The Neck Bay West, Shaw Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Neck Bay West, Shaw Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°27.161′S 149°04.266′E

2

East along the parallel 20°27.161′S to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.161′S (at the point closest to 20°27.161′S 149°04.497′E)

3

Southwesterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°28.639′S (at the point closest to 20°28.639′S 149°04.160′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°28.639′S to longitude 149°03.806′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.806′E to latitude 20°28.216′S

6

East along the parallel 20°28.216′S to longitude 149°04.102′E

7

North along the meridian 149°04.102′E to latitude 20°27.574′S

8

East along the parallel 20°27.574′S to longitude 149°04.266′E

9

North along the meridian 149°04.266′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

109  Nellie Bay Location

  The Nellie Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Nellie Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.357′S 148°30.093′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.357′S to longitude 148°31.155′E

3

South along the meridian 148°31.155′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°31.155′E (at the point closest to 20°05.440′S 148°31.155′E)

4

Generally westerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°30.417′E (at the point closest to 20°05.250′S 148°30.417′E)

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°04.924′S 148°30.093′E

6

North along the meridian 148°30.093′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

110  Nicolson Island Location

  The Nicolson Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Nicolson Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.864′S (at the point closest to 20°17.864′S 149°05.582′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°17.864′S to longitude 149°06.148′E

3

South along the meridian 149°06.148′E to latitude 20°18.898′S

4

West along the parallel 20°18.898′S to longitude 149°05.268′E

5

North along the meridian 149°05.268′E to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.268′E (at the point closest to 20°18.109′S 149°05.268′E)

6

Generally easterly then northerly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

111  North Molle Island Location

  The North Molle Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

North Molle Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°12.524′S 148°48.242′E

2

East along the parallel 20°12.524′S to longitude 148°50.124′E

3

South along the meridian 148°50.124′E to latitude 20°14.655′S

4

West along the parallel 20°14.655′S to longitude 148°48.242′E

5

North along the meridian 148°48.242′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

112  North Repulse Island Location

  The North Repulse Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

North Repulse Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°34.391′S 148°51.142′E

2

East along the parallel 20°34.391′S to longitude 148°52.350′E

3

South along the meridian 148°52.350′E to latitude 20°35.386′S

4

West along the parallel 20°35.386′S to longitude 148°51.142′E

5

North along the meridian 148°51.142′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

113  Olden Island Location

  The Olden Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Olden Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.447′S 148°33.789′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.447′S to longitude 148°34.948′E

3

South along the meridian 148°34.948′E to latitude 20°06.775′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.775′S to longitude 148°33.789′E

5

North along the meridian 148°33.789′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

114  Pandanus Bay, Long and Pelican Islands Location

  The Pandanus Bay, Long and Pelican Islands Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Pandanus Bay, Long and Pelican Islands Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°19.715′S (at the point closest to 20°19.715′S 148°51.414′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°19.715′S to longitude 148°51.718′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.718′E to latitude 20°19.825′S

4

West along the parallel 20°19.825′S to longitude 148°51.502′E

5

South along the meridian 148°51.502′E to latitude 20°20.480′S

6

East along the parallel 20°20.480′S to longitude 148°51.718′E

7

South along the meridian 148°51.718′E to latitude 20°21.150′S

8

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°21.832′S 148°52.530′E

9

West along the parallel 20°21.832′S to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.832′S (at the point closest to 20°21.832′S 148°51.804′E)

10

Generally northerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

115  Paradise Bay, Long Island Location

  The Paradise Bay, Long Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Paradise Bay, Long Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°22.930′S (at the point closest to 20°22.930′S 148°51.141′E)

2

Generally southeasterly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.046′E (at the point closest to 20°23.765′S 148°52.046′E)

3

West along the parallel 20°23.765′S to longitude 148°51.141′E

4

North along the meridian 148°51.141′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

116  Pentecost Island Location

  The Pentecost Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Pentecost Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°23.281′S 149°01.045′E

2

East along the parallel 20°23.281′S to longitude 149°02.524′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.524′E to latitude 20°24.567′S

4

West along the parallel 20°24.567′S to longitude 149°01.045′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.045′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

117  Perseverance Island Location

  The Perseverance Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Perseverance Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°20.764′S 148°59.132′E

2

East along the parallel 20°20.764′S to longitude 149°00.084′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.084′E to latitude 20°21.171′S

4

West along the parallel 20°21.171′S to longitude 148°59.904′E

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°21.729′S 148°59.565′E

6

South along the meridian 148°59.565′E to latitude 20°21.923′S

7

West along the parallel 20°21.923′S to longitude 148°59.132′E

8

North along the meridian 148°59.132′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

118  Peter Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Peter Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Peter Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.138′S (at the point closest to 20°11.138′S 148°59.075′E)

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°59.598′E (at the point closest to 20°12.141′S 148°59.598′E)

3

Generally westerly then northerly then northeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

119  Peter Head East, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Peter Head East, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Peter Head East, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.258′S (at the point closest to 20°12.258′S 148°59.840′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°12.258′S to longitude 149°00.223′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.223′E to latitude 20°12.959′S

4

West along the parallel 20°12.959′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.959′S (at the point closest to 20°12.959′S 148°59.841′E)

5

Generally northerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

120  Petrel Islet Location

  The Petrel Islet Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Petrel Islet Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°11.541′S 149°06.551′E

2

East along the parallel 20°11.541′S to longitude 149°07.246′E

3

South along the meridian 149°07.246′E to latitude 20°12.199′S

4

West along the parallel 20°12.199′S to longitude 149°06.551′E

5

North along the meridian 149°06.551′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

121  Pig Bay, Haslewood Island Location

  The Pig Bay, Haslewood Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Pig Bay, Haslewood Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.183′E (at the point closest to 20°17.741′S 149°04.183′E)

2

Generally easterly then southwesterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°18.029′S (at the point closest to 20°18.029′S 149°04.413′E)

3

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

122  Pine Island Location

  The Pine Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Pine Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°21.832′S 148°52.530′E

2

East along the parallel 20°21.832′S to longitude 148°54.069′E

3

South along the meridian 148°54.069′E to latitude 20°23.409′S

4

West along the parallel 20°23.409′S to longitude 148°52.829′E

5

North along the meridian 148°52.829′E to latitude 20°22.798′S

6

Northerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

123  Pioneer Rocks Location

  The Pioneer Rocks Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Pioneer Rocks Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.215′S 148°45.108′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.215′S to longitude 148°45.805′E

3

South along the meridian 148°45.805′E to latitude 20°13.758′S

4

West along the parallel 20°13.758′S to longitude 148°45.108′E

5

North along the meridian 148°45.108′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

124  Plantation Bay, Lindeman Island Location

  The Plantation Bay, Lindeman Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Plantation Bay, Lindeman Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.072′S (at the point closest to 20°27.072′S 149°03.920′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°27.072′S to longitude 149°04.298′E

3

South along the meridian 149°04.298′E to latitude 20°27.161′S

4

West along the parallel 20°27.161′S to longitude 149°04.266′E

5

South along the meridian 149°04.266′E to latitude 20°27.574′S

6

West along the parallel 20°27.574′S to longitude 149°03.364′E

7

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°27.847′S 149°02.632′E

8

West along the parallel 20°27.847′S to longitude 149°02.038′E

9

North along the meridian 149°02.038′E to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.648′S (at the point closest to 20°27.648′S 149°02.038′E)

10

Generally easterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

125  Planton Island Location

  The Planton Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Planton Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.566′S 148°51.170′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.566′S to longitude 148°51.529′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.529′E to latitude 20°16.548′S

4

West along the parallel 20°16.548′S to longitude 148°50.953′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.953′E to latitude 20°15.992′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

126  Puritan Bay Location

  The Puritan Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Puritan Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°27.171′S 148°52.284′E

2

Easterly along the geodesic to 20°27.625′S 148°54.206′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°28.477′S 148°55.013′E

4

South along the meridian 148°55.013′E to latitude 20°28.713′S

5

West along the parallel 20°28.713′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°28.713′S (at the point closest to 20°28.713′S 148°54.720′E)

6

Generally northwesterly then southwesterly then northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°27.459′S (at the point closest to 20°27.459′S 148°52.284′E)

7

North along the meridian 148°52.284′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

127  Queen Margrethe Bay, Shaw Island Location

  The Queen Margrethe Bay, Shaw Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Queen Margrethe Bay, Shaw Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.252′E (at the point closest to 20°29.105′S 149°06.252′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°29.105′S to longitude 149°06.406′E

3

South along the meridian 149°06.406′E to latitude 20°29.270′S

4

West along the parallel 20°29.270′S to longitude 149°06.301′E

5

South along the meridian 149°06.301′E to latitude 20°29.737′S

6

West along the parallel 20°29.737′S to longitude 149°06.014′E

7

North along the meridian 149°06.014′E to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.014′E (at the point closest to 20°29.467′S 149°06.014′E)

8

Northwesterly then southeasterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

128  Rattray Island Location

  The Rattray Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Rattray Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°59.048′S 148°32.714′E

2

East along the parallel 19°59.048′S to longitude 148°33.940′E

3

South along the meridian 148°33.940′E to latitude 20°00.422′S

4

West along the parallel 20°00.422′S to longitude 148°32.714′E

5

North along the meridian 148°32.714′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

129  Repair Island Location

  The Repair Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Repair Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.552′S 148°47.365′E

2

East along the parallel 20°17.552′S to longitude 148°47.611′E

3

South along the meridian 148°47.611′E to latitude 20°18.490′S

4

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.014′S 148°47.240′E

5

North along the meridian 148°47.240′E to latitude 20°17.833′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

130  Repulse Bay East Location

  The Repulse Bay East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Repulse Bay East Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°45.825′E (at the point closest to 20°28.776′S 148°45.825′E)

2

Generally northeasterly then south easterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°32.128′S (at the point closest to 20°32.128′S 148°55.878′E)

3

South along the meridian 148°55.878′E to latitude 20°32.307′S

4

West along the parallel 20°32.307′S to longitude 148°55.232′E

5

South along the meridian 148°55.232′E to latitude 20°32.629′S

6

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°33.020′S 148°54.019′E

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°31.943′S 148°51.356′E

8

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°29.833′S 148°49.042′E

9

West along the parallel 20°29.833′S to longitude 148°48.695′E

10

North along the meridian 148°48.695′E to latitude 20°28.609′S

11

West along the parallel 20°28.609′S to longitude 148°47.265′E

12

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°29.389′S 148°46.230′E

13

West along the parallel 20°29.389′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the parallel 20°29.389′S (at the point closest to 20°29.389′S 148°45.825′E)

14

North along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

131  Ripple Rocks Location

  The Ripple Rocks Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Ripple Rocks Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°31.340′S 148°56.005′E

2

East along the parallel 20°31.340′S to longitude 148°56.299′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°31.546′S 148°56.551′E

4

South along the meridian 148°56.551′E to latitude 20°31.889′S

5

West along the parallel 20°31.889′S to longitude 148°56.005′E

6

North along the meridian 148°56.005′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

132  Roberta Bay, Shaw Island Location

  The Roberta Bay, Shaw Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Roberta Bay, Shaw Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.014′E (at the point closest to 20°29.467′S 149°06.014′E)

2

South along the meridian 149°06.014′E to latitude 20°29.976′S

3

West along the parallel 20°29.976′S to longitude 149°05.056′E

4

North along the meridian 149°05.056′E to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°05.056′E (at the point closest to 20°29.614′S 149°05.056′E)

5

Generally northerly then southeasterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

133  Rooper Inlet Location

  The Rooper Inlet Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Rooper Inlet Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.833′S 148°47.099′E

2

East along the parallel 20°17.833′S to longitude 148°47.240′E

3

South along the meridian 148°47.240′E to latitude 20°18.014′S

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°18.490′S 148°47.611′E

5

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°18.984′S 148°48.928′E

6

South along the meridian 148°48.928′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.928′E (at the point closest to 20°19.243′S 148°48.928′E)

7

Generally westerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°47.099′E (at the point closest to 20°18.527′S 148°47.099′E)

8

North along the meridian 148°47.099′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

134  Saba Bay, Hook Island Location

  The Saba Bay, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Saba Bay, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.406′E (at the point closest to 20°06.445′S 148°57.406′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°57.406′E to latitude 20°06.858′S

3

West along the parallel 20°06.858′S to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°06.858′S (at the point closest to 20°06.858′S 148°56.556′E)

4

Generally northerly then northeasterly then southeasterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

135  Saddleback Island Location

  The Saddleback Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Saddleback Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°03.117′S 148°31.802′E

2

East along the parallel 20°03.117′S to longitude 148°33.052′E

3

South along the meridian 148°33.052′E to latitude 20°03.945′S

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°04.375′S 148°32.268′E

5

West along the parallel 20°04.375′S to longitude 148°31.802′E

6

North along the meridian 148°31.802′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

136  Sandy Bay, Long Island Location

  The Sandy Bay, Long Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Sandy Bay, Long Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.270′S (at the point closest to 20°21.270′S 148°50.451′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°21.270′S to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.270′S (at the point closest to 20°21.270′S 148°50.773′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°22.216′S (at the point closest to 20°22.216′S 148°50.958′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°22.216′S to longitude 148°50.451′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.451′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

137  Sawmill Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Sawmill Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Sawmill Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.974′S (at the point closest to 20°14.974′S 148°57.200′E)

2

Generally southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.267′E (at the point closest to 20°15.755′S 148°56.267′E)

3

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

138  Seaforth Island Location

  The Seaforth Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Seaforth Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°27.847′S 149°01.627′E

2

East along the parallel 20°27.847′S to longitude 149°02.632′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.632′E to latitude 20°28.768′S

4

West along the parallel 20°28.768′S to longitude 149°01.817′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.817′E to latitude 20°28.292′S

6

West along the parallel 20°28.292′S to longitude 149°01.627′E

7

North along the meridian 149°01.627′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

139  Shaw Island Reef (No 5) Location

  The Shaw Island Reef (No 5) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Shaw Island Reef (No 5) Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°29.888′S 149°01.888′E

2

East along the parallel 20°29.888′S to longitude 149°02.268′E

3

South along the meridian 149°02.277′E to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.277′E (at the point closest to 20°30.212′S 149°02.277′E)

4

Generally southeasterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.889′E (at the point closest to 20°31.526′S 149°02.889′E)

5

South along the meridian 149°02.889′E to latitude 20°31.900′S

6

West along the parallel 20°31.900′S to longitude 149°02.541′E

7

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°30.562′S 149°01.888′E

8

North along the meridian 149°01.888′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

140  Shaw Island Reef (No 6) Location

  The Shaw Island Reef (No 6) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Shaw Island Reef (No 6) Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°29.614′S (at the point closest to 20°29.614′S 149°05.056′E)

2

South along the meridian 149°05.056′E to latitude 20°30.692′S

3

West along the parallel 20°30.692′S to longitude 149°04.449′E

4

South along the meridian 149°04.449′E to latitude 20°31.900′S

5

West along the parallel 20°31.900′S to longitude 149°04.038′E

6

North along the meridian 149°04.038′E to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.038′E (at the point closest to 20°31.628′S 149°04.038′E)

7

Generally northeasterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

141  Shoal Bay Location

  The Shoal Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Shoal Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the parallel 20°03.578′S (at the point closest to 20°03.578′S 148°27.144′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°03.578′S to longitude 148°28.973′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°04.357′S 148°29.577′E

4

South along the meridian 148°29.577′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°29.577′E (at the point closest to 20°04.701′S 148°29.577′E)

5

Generally northwesterly then westerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°27.181′E (at the point closest to 20°03.602′S 148°27.181′E)

6

Northwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

142  Shute Harbour Location

  The Shute Harbour Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Shute Harbour Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°47.611′E (at the point closest to 20°17.486′S 148°47.611′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°47.611′E to latitude 20°17.552′S

3

West along the parallel 20°17.552′S to longitude 148°47.365′E

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°17.833′S 148°47.240′E

5

West along the parallel 20°17.833′S to longitude 148°47.099′E

6

North along the meridian 148°47.099′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°47.099′E (at the point closest to 20°17.587′S 148°47.099′E)

7

Generally northeasterly then southeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

143  Shute Island Location

  The Shute Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Shute Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.404′S 148°47.897′E

2

East along the parallel 20°17.404′S to longitude 148°48.390′E

3

South along the meridian 148°48.390′E to latitude 20°18.490′S

4

West along the parallel 20°18.490′S to longitude 148°47.897′E

5

North along the meridian 148°47.897′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

144  Sidney Island Location

  The Sidney Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Sidney Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°26.646′S 149°00.245′E

2

East along the parallel 20°26.646′S to longitude 149°00.885′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.885′E to latitude 20°27.292′S

4

West along the parallel 20°27.292′S to longitude 149°00.245′E

5

North along the meridian 149°00.245′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

145  Sillago Island Location

  The Sillago Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Sillago Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.816′S 149°09.268′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.816′S to longitude 149°10.028′E

3

South along the meridian 149°10.028′E to latitude 20°14.576′S

4

West along the parallel 20°14.576′S to longitude 149°09.741′E

5

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°13.924′S 149°09.268′E

6

North along the meridian 149°09.268′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

146  Sinker Reef Location

  The Sinker Reef Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Sinker Reef Location

Item

Description

1

The point 19°42.671′S 149°11.984′E

2

East along the parallel 19°42.671′S to longitude 149°12.412′E

3

South along the meridian 149°12.412′E to latitude 19°43.214′S

4

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 19°43.385′S 149°12.098′E

5

West along the parallel 19°43.385′S to longitude 149°11.680′E

6

North along the meridian 149°11.680′E to latitude 19°43.114′S

7

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

147  South Molle Island East Location

  The South Molle Island East Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Molle Island East Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.153′S 148°50.956′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.153′S to longitude 148°51.288′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.288′E to latitude 20°15.566′S

4

West along the parallel 20°15.566′S to longitude 148°51.170′E

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°15.992′S 148°50.953′E

6

South along the meridian 148°50.953′E to latitude 20°16.548′S

7

West along the parallel 20°16.548′S to longitude 148°50.798′E

8

South along the meridian 148°50.798′E to latitude 20°17.039′S

9

West along the parallel 20°17.039′S to longitude 148°50.647′E

10

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°17.502′S 148°49.612′E

11

North along the meridian 148°49.612′E to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.612′E (at the point closest to 20°17.111′S 148°49.612′E)

12

Generally northeasterly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.956′E (at the point closest to 20°15.402′S 148°50.956′E)

13

North along the meridian 148°50.956′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

148  South Molle Island West Location

  The South Molle Island West Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Molle Island West Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.151′S 148°49.279′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.151′S to the intersection of the Mid Molle Island (20034) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.151′S (at the point closest to 20°15.151′S 148°49.899′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Mid Molle Island (20034) and South Molle Island (20042a) coastlines at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.612′E (at the point closest to 20°17.111′S 148°49.612′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°49.612′E to latitude 20°17.502′S

5

West along the parallel 20°17.502′S to longitude 148°49.279′E

6

North along the meridian 148°49.279′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

149  South Repulse Island Location

  The South Repulse Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Repulse Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°36.099′S 148°51.474′E

2

East along the parallel 20°36.099′S to longitude 148°52.210′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°36.686′S 148°52.991′E

4

South along the meridian 148°52.991′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°52.991′E (at the point closest to 20°37.318′S 148°52.991′E)

5

Southwesterly along the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary to the intersection of the Whitsunday Planning Area boundary and the meridian 148°52.214′E (at the point closest to 20°37.519′S 148°52.214′E)

6

West along the parallel 20°37.519′S to longitude 148°51.474′E

7

North along the meridian 148°51.474′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

150  Spitfire Rock Location

  The Spitfire Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Spitfire Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°28.292′S 149°01.405′E

2

East along the parallel 20°28.292′S to longitude 149°01.817′E

3

South along the meridian 149°01.817′E to latitude 20°28.902′S

4

West along the parallel 20°28.902′S to longitude 149°01.405′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.405′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

151  St Helen Rock Location

  The St Helen Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

St Helen Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°32.878′S 149°04.351′E

2

East along the parallel 20°32.878′S to longitude 149°04.978′E

3

South along the meridian 149°04.978′E to latitude 20°33.490′S

4

West along the parallel 20°33.490′S to longitude 149°04.351′E

5

North along meridian 149°04.351′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

152  Steen’s Beach, Hook Island Location

  The Steen’s Beach, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Steen’s Beach, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°03.361′S 148°54.947′E

2

East along the parallel 20°03.361′S to longitude 148°55.330′E

3

South along the meridian 148°55.330′E to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.330′E (at the point closest to 20°03.734′S 148°55.330′E)

4

Generally southwesterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°04.740′S (at the point closest to 20°04.740′S 148°54.099′E)

5

West along the parallel 20°04.740′S to longitude 148°53.916′E

6

North along the meridian 148°53.916′E to latitude 20°04.438′S

7

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°03.782′S 148°54.516′E

8

North along the meridian 148°54.516′E to latitude 20°03.530′S

9

East along the parallel 20°03.530′S to longitude 148°54.947′E

10

North along the meridian 148°54.947′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

153  Stockyard Beach, Haslewood Island Location

  The Stockyard Beach, Haslewood Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Stockyard Beach, Haslewood Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°16.323′S 149°04.125′E

2

East along the parallel 20°16.323′S to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.323′S (at the point closest to 20°16.323′S 149°04.511′E)

3

Generally southerly then southwesterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.057′S (at the point closest to 20°17.057′S 149°04.306′E)

4

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°16.791′S 149°04.125′E

5

North along the meridian 149°04.125′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

154  Stonehaven Anchorage, Hook Island Location

  The Stonehaven Anchorage, Hook Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Stonehaven Anchorage, Hook Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°04.740′S 148°53.916′E

2

East along the parallel 20°04.740′S to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°04.740′S (at the point closest to 20°04.740′S 148°54.099′E)

3

Generally southeasterly then southwesterly along the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hook Island (20028) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.385′E (at the point closest to 20°06.635′S 148°53.385′E)

4

North along the meridian 148°53.385′E to latitude 20°06.324′S

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°05.810′S 148°53.916′E

6

North along the meridian 148°53.916′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

155  Surprise Rock Location

  The Surprise Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Surprise Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°21.037′S 149°01.311′E

2

East along the parallel 20°21.037′S to longitude 149°01.854′E

3

South along the meridian 149°01.854′E to latitude 20°21.579′S

4

West along the parallel 20°21.579′S to longitude 149°01.311′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.311′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

156  Swamp Bay Location

  The Swamp Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Swamp Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.312′S (at the point closest to 20°15.312′S 148°46.608′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°15.312′S to longitude 148°46.913′E

3

South along the meridian 148°46.913′E to latitude 20°15.950′S

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°16.402′S 148°48.034′E

5

South along the meridian 148°48.034′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.034′E (at the point closest to 20°16.667′S 148°48.034′E)

6

Generally westerly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

157  Tancred Island Location

  The Tancred Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Tancred Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.404′S (at the point closest to 20°17.404′S 148°47.656′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°17.404′S to longitude 148°47.897′E

3

South along the meridian 148°47.897′E to latitude 20°18.490′S

4

West along the parallel 20°18.490′S to longitude 148°47.611′E

5

North along the meridian 148°47.611′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°47.611′E (at the point closest to 20°17.486′S 148°47.611′E)

6

Generally northeasterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

158  Teague Island Location

  The Teague Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Teague Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.679′S 149°04.003′E

2

East along the parallel 20°17.679′S to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.679′S (at the point closest to 20°17.679′S 149°04.164′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.183′E (at the point closest to 20°17.741′S 149°04.183′E)

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°18.029′S (at the point closest to 20°18.029′S 149°04.413′E)

5

Southeasterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.593′E (at the point closest to 20°18.174′S 149°04.593′E)

6

South along the meridian 149°04.593′E to latitude 20°18.898′S

7

West along the parallel 20°18.898′S to longitude 149°03.754′E

8

North along the meridian 149°03.754′E to latitude 20°18.135′S

9

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

159  Thomas Island Location

  The Thomas Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Thomas Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°31.889′S 149°06.504′E

2

East along the parallel 20°31.889′S to longitude 149°07.044′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°32.625′S 149°07.864′E

4

West along the parallel 20°32.625′S to longitude 149°07.754′E

5

South along the meridian 149°07.754′E to latitude 20°33.255′S

6

West along the parallel 20°33.255′S to longitude 149°07.330′E

7

South along the meridian 149°07.330′E to latitude 20°33.581′S

8

West along the parallel 20°33.581′S to longitude 149°06.236′E

9

North along the meridian 149°06.236′E to latitude 20°33.372′S

10

West along the parallel 20°33.372′S to longitude 149°05.464′E

11

North along the meridian 149°05.464′E to latitude 20°32.476′S

12

East along the parallel 20°32.476′S to longitude 149°05.625′E

13

North along the meridian 149°05.625′E to latitude 20°32.278′S

14

East along the parallel 20°32.278′S to longitude 149°06.050′E

15

North along the meridian 149°06.050′E to latitude 20°32.097′S

16

East along the parallel 20°32.097′S to longitude 149°06.504′E

17

North along the meridian 149°06.504′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

160  Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Tongue Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.639′S 149°00.670′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.639′S to longitude 149°00.977′E

3

South along the meridian 149°00.977′E to latitude 20°13.808′S

4

East along the parallel 20°13.808′S to longitude 149°01.563′E

5

South along the meridian 149°01.563′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.563′E (at the point closest to 20°14.134′S 149°01.563′E)

6

Generally southwesterly then northeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°00.670′E (at the point closest to 20°13.969′S 149°00.670′E)

7

North along the meridian 149°00.670′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

161  Trammel Bay Location

  The Trammel Bay Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Trammel Bay Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.928′E (at the point closest to 20°19.243′S 148°48.928′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°19.243′S to longitude 148°49.257′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°20.945′S 148°50.602′E

4

South along the meridian 148°50.602′E to latitude 20°21.270′S

5

West along the parallel 20°21.270′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°21.270′S (at the point closest to 20°21.270′S 148°50.451′E)

6

Generally northwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

162  Triangle Island Location

  The Triangle Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Triangle Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°28.826′S 149°06.406′E

2

East along the parallel 20°28.826′S to longitude 149°07.046′E

3

South along the meridian 149°07.046′E to latitude 20°29.244′S

4

East along the parallel 20°29.244′S to longitude 149°07.139′E

5

South along the meridian 149°07.139′E to latitude 20°29.874′S

6

West along the parallel 20°29.874′S to longitude 149°06.301′E

7

North along the meridian 149°06.301′E to latitude 20°29.270′S

8

East along the parallel 20°29.270′S to longitude 149°06.406′E

9

North along the meridian 149°06.406′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

163  Turtle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Turtle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Turtle Bay, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.066′S 148°59.562′E

2

South along the meridian 148°59.562′E to latitude 20°19.656′S

3

West along the parallel 20°19.656′S to longitude 148°59.169′E

4

North along the meridian 148°59.169′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°59.169′E (at the point closest to 20°19.387′S 148°59.169′E)

5

Generally northerly then southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.372′E (at the point closest to 20°19.346′S 149°01.372′E)

6

South along the meridian 149°01.372′E to latitude 20°19.616′S

7

West along the parallel 20°19.616′S to longitude 149°01.119′E

8

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.066′S 149°00.438′E

9

West along the parallel 20°19.066′S to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

164  Unnamed Island (20‑059) Location

  The Unnamed Island (20059) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Unnamed Island (20059) Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°22.216′S 148°57.530′E

2

East along the parallel 20°22.216′S to longitude 148°58.140′E

3

South along the meridian 148°58.140′E to latitude 20°22.690′S

4

West along the parallel 20°22.690′S to longitude 148°57.530′E

5

North along the meridian 148°57.530′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

165  Unnamed Island (20‑023), Armit Islets (No 1) Location

  The Unnamed Island (20023), Armit Islets (No 1) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Unnamed Island (20023), Armit Islets (No 1) Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.210′S 148°39.706′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.210′S to longitude 148°40.190′E

3

South along the meridian 148°40.190′E to latitude 20°07.079′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.079′S to longitude 148°39.706′E

5

North along the meridian 148°39.706′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

166  Unnamed Reef (20‑025a/b, 20‑622) Location

  The Unnamed Reef (20025a/b, 20622) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Unnamed Reef (20025a/b, 20622) Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°04.047′S (at the point closest to 20°04.047′S 148°33.828′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°04.047′S to longitude 148°34.111′E

3

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°05.447′S 148°34.444′E

4

West along the parallel 20°05.447′S to longitude 148°33.789′E

5

South along the meridian 148°33.789′E to latitude 20°06.775′S

6

East along the parallel 20°06.775′S to longitude 148°34.761′E

7

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°07.612′S 148°34.958′E

8

West along the parallel 20°07.612′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°34.682′E (at the point closest to 20°07.612′S 148°34.682′E)

9

Generally northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

167  Unnamed Reef (20‑628) Location

  The Unnamed Reef (20628) Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Unnamed Reef (20628) Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.156′S 148°46.524′E

2

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°15.312′S 148°46.913′E

3

West along the parallel 20°15.312′S to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.312′S (at the point closest to 20°15.312′S 148°46.608′E)

4

Northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.398′S (at the point closest to 20°14.398′S 148°46.254′E)

5

East along the parallel 20°14.398′S to longitude 148°46.524′E

6

North along the meridian 148°46.524′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

168  Volskow Island Location

  The Volskow Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Volskow Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°29.976′S 149°05.056′E

2

East along the parallel 20°29.976′S to longitude 149°05.784′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.784′E to latitude 20°30.692′S

4

West along the parallel 20°30.692′S to longitude 149°05.056′E

5

North along the meridian 149°05.056′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

169  White Bay, Haslewood and Lupton Islands Location

  The White Bay, Haslewood and Lupton Islands Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

White Bay, Haslewood and Lupton Islands Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.081′S (at the point closest to 20°16.081′S 149°06.057′E)

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Lupton Island (20078b) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.153′S (at the point closest to 20°16.153′S 149°06.168′E)

3

Southerly then easterly then southerly along the Lupton Island (20078b) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lupton Island (20078b) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.650′E (at the point closest to 20°17.362′S 149°06.650′E)

4

South along the meridian 149°06.650′E to latitude 20°17.632′S

5

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°17.864′S 149°06.148′E

6

West along the parallel 20°17.864′S to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.864′S (at the point closest to 20°17.864′S 149°05.582′E)

7

Generally northerly then northeasterly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

170  White Rock Location

  The White Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

White Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°17.834′S 148°48.390′E

2

East along the parallel 20°17.834′S to longitude 148°48.926′E

3

South along the meridian 148°48.926′E to latitude 20°18.490′S

4

West along the parallel 20°18.490′S to longitude 148°48.390′E

5

North along the meridian 148°48.390′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

171  Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitehaven Beach, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.519′E (at the point closest to 20°15.400′S 149°01.519′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°15.400′S to longitude 149°01.866′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°16.347′S 149°02.295′E

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°17.279′S 149°03.075′E

5

East along the parallel 20°17.279′S to longitude 149°03.782′E

6

South along the meridian 149°03.782′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.782′E (at the point closest to 20°17.679′S 149°03.782′E)

7

Generally northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

172  Whitsunday Island Reef (No 1/No 18), Whitsunday Island Location

  The Whitsunday Island Reef (No 1/No 18), Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitsunday Island Reef (No 1/No 18), Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.040′S 148°57.372′E

2

East along the parallel 20°09.040′S to longitude 148°59.028′E

3

South along the meridian 148°59.028′E to latitude 20°10.707′S

4

East along the parallel 20°10.707′S to longitude 148°59.380′E

5

South along the meridian 148°59.380′E to latitude 20°11.127′S

6

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°12.258′S 149°00.223′E

7

West along the parallel 20°12.258′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.258′S (at the point closest to 20°12.258′S 148°59.840′E)

8

Generally northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°59.598′E (at the point closest to 20°12.141′S 148°59.598′E)

9

Northwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°11.138′S (at the point closest to 20°11.138′S 148°59.075′E)

10

Generally northwesterly then northerly then westerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.372′E (at the point closest to 20°09.445′S 148°57.372′E)

11

North along the meridian 148°57.372′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

173  Whitsunday Island Reef (No 5), Whitsunday Island Location

  The Whitsunday Island Reef (No 5), Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitsunday Island Reef (No 5), Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.679′S (at the point closest to 20°17.679′S 149°03.782′E)

2

East along the parallel 20°17.679′S to longitude 149°04.003′E

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.135′S 149°03.754′E

4

South along the meridian 149°03.754′E to latitude 20°18.898′S

5

West along the parallel 20°18.898′S to longitude 149°03.130′E

6

North along the meridian 149°03.130′E to latitude 20°18.610′S

7

West along the parallel 20°18.610′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°18.610′S (at the point closest to 20°18.610′S 149°02.851′E)

8

Generally northeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

174  Whitsunday Island Reef (No 16/No 17), Whitsunday Island Location

  The Whitsunday Island Reef (No 16/No 17), Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitsunday Island Reef (No 16/No 17), Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.421′S 148°57.268′E

2

Easterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.372′E (at the point closest to 20°09.445′S 148°57.372′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°13.114′S (at the point closest to 20°13.114′S 148°56.913′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°13.114′S to longitude 148°56.537′E

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to 20°12.889′S 148°56.755′E

6

Northerly along the geodesic to 20°11.549′S 148°57.107′E

7

North along the meridian 148°57.107′E to latitude 20°09.846′S

8

Northerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

175  Whitsunday Island Reef (No 19/No 20), Whitsunday Island Location

  The Whitsunday Island Reef (No 19/No 20), Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitsunday Island Reef (No 19/No 20), Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°59.169′E (at the point closest to 20°19.387′S 148°59.169′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°59.169′E to latitude 20°19.656′S

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°20.002′S 148°58.276′E

4

West along the parallel 20°20.002′S to longitude 148°57.806′E

5

North along the meridian 148°57.806′E to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.806′E (at the point closest to 20°19.728′S 148°57.806′E)

6

Generally easterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

176  Windy Bay, Haslewood Island Location

  The Windy Bay, Haslewood Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Windy Bay, Haslewood Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.787′S 149°05.953′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.787′S to longitude 149°06.177′E

3

South along the meridian 149°06.177′E to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°06.177′E (at the point closest to 20°15.057′S 149°06.177′E)

4

Generally southerly then westerly along the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Haslewood Island (20078a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°04.698′E (at the point closest to 20°15.989′S 149°04.698′E)

5

North along the meridian 149°04.698′E to latitude 20°15.334′S

6

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

177  Wirrainbeia Island Location

  The Wirrainbeia Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Wirrainbeia Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°13.826′S 149°08.157′E

2

East along the parallel 20°13.826′S to longitude 149°08.779′E

3

South along the meridian 149°08.779′E to latitude 20°14.392′S

4

West along the parallel 20°14.392′S to longitude 149°08.157′E

5

North along the meridian 149°08.157′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

178  Woodwark Bay North Location

  The Woodwark Bay North Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Woodwark Bay North Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°09.939′S 148°38.318′E

2

Easterly along the geodesic to 20°10.293′S 148°40.609′E

3

South along the meridian 148°40.609′E to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°40.609′E (at the point closest to 20°10.544′S 148°40.609′E)

4

Generally southwesterly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.166′S (at the point closest to 20°12.166′S 148°39.597′E)

5

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.124′S (at the point closest to 20°12.124′S 148°38.874′E)

6

Generally northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°10.207′S (at the point closest to 20°10.207′S 148°38.318′E)

7

North along the meridian 148°38.318′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

179  Woodwark Bay South Location

  The Woodwark Bay South Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Woodwark Bay South Location

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.124′S (at the point closest to 20°12.124′S 148°38.874′E)

2

Easterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the mainland coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.166′S (at the point closest to 20°12.166′S 148°39.597′E)

3

Generally southwesterly then northerly along the mainland coastline at mean low water to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

180  Workington Island Location

  The Workington Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Workington Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.669′S 149°07.036′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.669′S to longitude 149°07.815′E

3

South along the meridian 149°07.815′E to latitude 20°16.714′S

4

West along the parallel 20°16.714′S to longitude 149°07.036′E

5

North along the meridian 149°07.036′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

181  Yellow Rock Location

  The Yellow Rock Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Yellow Rock Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°28.318′S 149°03.249′E

2

East along the parallel 20°28.318′S to longitude 149°03.806′E

3

South along the meridian 149°03.806′E to latitude 20°28.807′S

4

West along the parallel 20°28.807′S to longitude 149°03.249′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.249′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

182  Yvonne’s Coves, Whitsunday Island Location

  The Yvonne’s Coves, Whitsunday Island Location is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Yvonne’s Coves, Whitsunday Island Location

Item

Description

1

The point 20°16.927′S 148°54.364′E

2

East along the parallel 20°16.927′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.927′S (at the point closest to 20°16.927′S 148°54.750′E)

3

Generally southerly then easterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.240′E (at the point closest to 20°18.438′S 148°56.240′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°56.240′E to latitude 20°18.734′S

5

West along the parallel 20°18.734′S to longitude 148°55.950′E

6

Northwesterly along the geodesic to 20°18.352′S 148°55.667′E

7

West along the parallel 20°18.352′S to longitude 148°54.847′E

8

North along the meridian 148°54.847′E to latitude 20°17.784′S

9

West along the parallel 20°17.784′S to longitude 148°54.364′E

10

North along the meridian 148°54.364′E to the starting point

Note: The airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in the area is also part of the Location.

Schedule 4—Designated motorised water sports areas

Note: See the definition of designated motorised water sports area in Schedule 9.

 

 

1  Hayman Island and Arkhurst Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

  The Hayman Island and Arkhurst Island Complex designated motorised water sports area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hayman Island and Arkhurst Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°03.283′S 148°51.318′E

2

East along the parallel 20°03.283′S to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°03.283′S (at the point closest to 20°03.283′S 148°52.722′E)

3

Southerly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°03.516′S (at the point closest to 20°03.516′S 148°52.701′E)

4

Southerly along the geodesic to intersect with the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the meridian 148°52.375′E (at the point closest to 20°04.639′S 148°52.375′E)

5

West along the parallel 20°04.639′S to longitude 148°51.318′E

6

North along the meridian 148°51.318′E to the starting point

2  North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

  The North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

North Molle Island and Daydream Island Complex designated motorised water sports area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°12.811′S 148°47.668′E

2

East along the parallel 20°12.811′S to the intersection of the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°12.811′S (at the point closest to 20°12.811′S 148°48.572′E)

3

Generally southeasterly along the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the North Molle Island (20033) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.522′E (at the point closest to 20°14.529′S 148°49.522′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°49.522′E to latitude 20°14.756′S

5

West along the parallel 20°14.756′S to longitude 148°48.874′E

6

South along the meridian 148°48.874′E to the intersection of the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°48.874′E (at the point closest to 20°15.025′S 148°48.874′E)

7

Generally southerly along the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Daydream Island (20035) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.201′S (at the point closest to 20°15.201′S 148°48.756′E)

8

West along the parallel 20°15.201′S to longitude 148°48.465′E

9

South along the meridian 148°48.465′E to latitude 20°15.628′S

10

West along the parallel 20°15.628′S to longitude 148°47.668′E

11

North along the meridian 148°47.668′E to the starting point

3  Fitzalan Passage designated motorised water sports area

  The Fitzalan Passage designated motorised water sports area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Fitzalan Passage designated motorised water sports area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.158′S 148°56.346′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.158′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island Reef (No 9) (20041j) reef edge and the parallel 20°19.158′S (at the point closest to 20°19.158′S 148°56.919′E)

3

Generally southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island Reef (No 9) (20041j) reef edge to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island Reef (No 9) (20041j) reef edge and the parallel 20°19.544′S (at the point closest to 20°19.544′S 148°57.592′E)

4

South along the meridian 148°57.592′E to the intersection of the Fitzalan Island Reef (20041) reef edge and the meridian 148°57.592′E (at the point closest to 20°19.753′S 148°57.592′E)

5

Generally southwesterly along the Fitzalan Island Reef (20041) reef edge to the intersection of the Fitzalan Island Reef (20041) reef edge and the parallel 20°19.925′S (at the point closest to 20°19.925′S 148°57.468′E)

6

West along the parallel 20°19.925′S to longitude 148°57.348′E

7

North along the meridian 148°57.348′E to latitude 20°19.588′S

8

West along the parallel 20°19.588′S to longitude 148°56.875′E

9

Southwesterly along the geodesic to 20°19.868′S 148°56.346′E

10

North along the meridian 148°56.346′E to the starting point

Schedule 6—Significant bird sites

Note: See the definition of significant bird site in Schedule 9.

 

 

1  Bird Island significant bird site

  The Bird Island significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bird Island significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°05.191′S 148°52.102′E

2

East along the parallel 20°05.191′S to longitude 148°52.440′E

3

South along the meridian 148°52.440′E to latitude 20°05.612′S

4

West along the parallel 20°05.612′S to longitude 148°52.102′E

5

North along the meridian 148°52.102′E to the starting point

2  East Rock significant bird site

  The East Rock significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

East Rock significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.996′S 148°51.488′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.996′S to longitude 148°51.789′E

3

South along the meridian 148°51.789′E to latitude 20°20.294′S

4

West along the parallel 20°20.294′S to longitude 148°51.488′E

5

North along the meridian 148°51.488′E to the starting point

3  Edwin Rock significant bird site

  The Edwin Rock significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Edwin Rock significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°07.411′S 148°36.615′E

2

East along the parallel 20°07.411′S to longitude 148°36.897′E

3

South along the meridian 148°36.897′E to latitude 20°07.692′S

4

West along the parallel 20°07.692′S to longitude 148°36.615′E

5

North along the meridian 148°36.615′E to the starting point

4  Eshelby Islands significant bird site

  The Eshelby Islands significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Eshelby Islands significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°00.480′S 148°36.962′E

2

East along the parallel 20°00.480′S to longitude 148°38.400′E

3

South along the meridian 148°38.400′E to latitude 20°01.920′S

4

West along the parallel 20°01.920′S to longitude 148°36.962′E

5

North along the meridian 148°36.962′E to the starting point

5  Armit Island (southern beach only) significant bird site

  The Armit Island (southern beach only) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Armit Island (southern beach only) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.347′S 148°38.670′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.347′S to the intersection of the Armit Island (20022c) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°06.347′S (at the point closest to 20°06.347′S 148°38.795′E)

3

Generally easterly along the Armit Island (20022c) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Armit Island (20022c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°39.130′E (at the point closest to 20°06.449′S 148°39.130′E)

4

East along the parallel 20°06.449′S to longitude 148°39.211′E

5

South along the meridian 148°39.211′E to latitude 20°06.533′S

6

West along the parallel 20°06.533′S to longitude 148°38.670′E

7

North along the meridian 148°38.670′E to the starting point

6  Double Cone Island (western island only) significant bird site

  The Double Cone Island (western island only) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Double Cone Island (western island only) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.201′S 148°42.375′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.201′S to longitude 148°42.773′E

3

South along the meridian 148°42.773′E to latitude 20°06.902′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.902′S to longitude 148°42.375′E

5

North along the meridian 148°42.375′E to the starting point

7  Grassy Island (southern beach only) significant bird site

  The Grassy Island (southern beach only) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Grassy Island (southern beach only) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Grassy Island (20030) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°36.437′E (at the point closest to 20°08.922′S 148°36.437′E)

2

South along the meridian 148°36.437′E to latitude 20°09.250′S

3

West along the parallel 20°09.250′S to the intersection of the Grassy Island (20030) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°09.250′S (at the point closest to 20°09.250′S 148°36.077′E)

4

Generally northeasterly along the Grassy Island (20030) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

8  Armit Islets (No 1) significant bird site

  The Armit Islets (No 1) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Armit Islets (No 1) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.410′S 148°39.211′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.410′S to longitude 148°39.717′E

3

South along the meridian 148°39.717′E to latitude 20°06.905′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.905′S to longitude 148°39.211′E

5

North along the meridian 148°39.211′E to the starting point

9  Olden Rock (south of Olden Island) significant bird site

  The Olden Rock (south of Olden Island) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Olden Rock (south of Olden Island) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°06.291′S 148°34.396′E

2

East along the parallel 20°06.291′S to longitude 148°34.775′E

3

South along the meridian 148°34.775′E to latitude 20°06.576′S

4

West along the parallel 20°06.576′S to longitude 148°34.396′E

5

North along the meridian 148°34.396′E to the starting point

10  Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point) significant bird site

  The Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Shaw Island (beach east of Burning Point) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°30.452′S 149°02.875′E

2

East along the parallel 20°30.452′S to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°30.452′S (at the point closest to 20°30.452′S 149°03.108′E)

3

Generally southwesterly along the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Shaw Island (20102a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.875′E (at the point closest to 20°30.609′S 149°02.875′E)

4

North along the meridian 149°02.875′E to the starting point

11  South Repulse Island (western beach only) significant bird site

  The South Repulse Island (western beach only) significant bird site is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

South Repulse Island (western beach only) significant bird site

Item

Description

1

The point 20°36.774′S 148°51.922′E

2

East along the parallel 20°36.774′S to longitude 148°52.146′E

3

South along the meridian 148°52.146′E to the intersection of the South Repulse Island (20210) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°52.146′E (at the point closest to 20°36.822′S 148°52.146′E)

4

Generally southwesterly along the South Repulse Island (20210) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Repulse Island (20210) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°51.922′E (at the point closest to 20°36.942′S 148°51.922′E)

5

North along the meridian 148°51.922′E to the starting point

Schedule 7—Regular aircraft landing areas

Note: See the definition of regular aircraft landing area in Schedule 9.

 

 

1  Hardy Reef regular aircraft landing area

  The Hardy Reef regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hardy Reef regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°42.997′S 149°10.643′E

2

East along the parallel 19°42.997′S to longitude 149°12.860′E

3

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 19°45.802′S 149°17.079′E

4

South along the meridian 149°17.079′E to latitude 19°48.716′S

5

West along the parallel 19°48.716′S to the intersection of the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge and the parallel 19°48.716′S (at the point closest to 19°48.716′S 149°15.204′E)

6

Northwesterly along the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge to the intersection of the Hook Reef (19136a) reef edge and the meridian 149°10.643′E (at the point closest to 19°44.266′S 149°10.643′E)

7

North along the meridian 149°10.643′E to the starting point

2  Bait Reef regular aircraft landing area

  The Bait Reef regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bait Reef regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 19°47.264′S 149°03.462′E

2

East along the parallel 19°47.264′S to longitude 149°05.359′E

3

South along the meridian 149°05.359′E to latitude 19°49.575′S

4

West along the parallel 19°49.575′S to longitude 149°03.462′E

5

North along the meridian 149°03.462′E to the starting point

3  Daydream Island regular aircraft landing area

  The Daydream Island regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Daydream Island regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.712′S 148°48.465′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.712′S to longitude 148°49.279′E

3

South along the meridian 148°49.279′E to latitude 20°16.037′S

4

West along the parallel 20°16.037′S to longitude 148°48.465′E

5

North along the meridian 148°48.465′E to the starting point

4  Bauer Bay and Mid Molle Island regular aircraft landing area

  The Bauer Bay and Mid Molle Island regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Bauer Bay and Mid Molle Island regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°15.153′S 148°49.891′E

2

East along the parallel 20°15.153′S to longitude 148°50.956′E

3

South along the meridian 148°50.956′E to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.956′E (at the point closest to 20°15.402′S 148°50.956′E)

4

Generally westerly along the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the South Molle Island (20042a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°49.891′E (at the point closest to 20°15.279′S 148°49.891′E)

5

North along the meridian to the starting point

5  Cid Harbour, Sawmill Bay, Hunt Channel and Dugong Inlet regular aircraft landing area

  The Cid Harbour, Sawmill Bay, Hunt Channel and Dugong Inlet regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Cid Harbour, Sawmill Bay, Hunt Channel and Dugong Inlet regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°14.249′S 148°55.920′E

2

East along the parallel 20°14.249′S to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°14.249′S (at the point closest to 20°14.249′S 148°56.271′E)

3

Generally southeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.530′E (at the point closest to 20°14.637′S 148°56.530′E)

4

Southeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.200′E (at the point closest to 20°14.974′S 148°57.200′E)

5

Generally southwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.267′E (at the point closest to 20°15.755′S 148°56.267′E)

6

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°15.926′S (at the point closest to 20°15.926′S 148°55.336′E)

7

Generally northerly along the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Cid Island (20040a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.171′E (at the point closest to 20°15.178′S 148°55.171′E)

8

North along the meridian 148°55.171′E to latitude 20°14.842′S

9

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the starting point

6  Whitehaven Beach regular aircraft landing area

  The Whitehaven Beach regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Whitehaven Beach regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°16.145′S 149°02.778′E

2

Southeasterly along the geodesic to 20°16.621′S 149°03.114′E

3

Southwesterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°17.181′S (at the point closest to 20°17.181′S 149°02.514′E)

4

Generally northwesterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°16.307′S (at the point closest to 20°16.307′S 149°01.937′E)

5

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

7  Chance Bay and Moon Island regular aircraft landing area

  The Chance Bay and Moon Island regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Chance Bay and Moon Island regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.844′E (at the point closest to 20°18.610′S 149°02.844′E)

2

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Unnamed Island (20041d) coastline at mean low and the meridian 149°02.811′E (at the point closest to 20°18.693′S 149°02.811′E)

3

Generally southwesterly along the Unnamed Island (20041d) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Unnamed Island (20041d) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°02.727′E (at the point closest to 20°18.922′S 149°02.727′E)

4

Southerly along the geodesic to 20°19.183′S 149°02.803′E

5

Westerly along the geodesic to 20°19.602′S 149°01.471′E

6

Northerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.372′E (at the point closest to 20°19.346′S 149°01.372′E)

7

Generally northeasterly along the Whitsunday Island (20041a) coastline at mean low water to the starting point

8  Happy Bay and Fish and Palm Bays regular aircraft landing area

  The Happy Bay and Fish and Palm Bays regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Happy Bay and Fish and Palm Bays regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The point 20°19.102′S 148°50.250′E

2

East along the parallel 20°19.102′S to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°50.930′E (at the point closest to 20°19.102′S 148°50.930′E)

3

Generally southerly along the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Long Island (20060) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.681′S (at the point closest to 20°20.681′S 148°50.839′E)

4

West along the parallel 20°20.681′S to longitude 148°50.250′E

5

North along the meridian 148°50.250′E to the starting point

9  Dent Passage and Dent and Hamilton Islands regular aircraft landing area

  The Dent Passage and Dent and Hamilton Islands regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Dent Passage and Dent and Hamilton Islands regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.902′E (at the point closest to 20°19.886′S 148°56.902′E)

2

Generally southerly along the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hamilton Island (20057) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°57.179′E (at the point closest to 20°22.666′S 148°57.179′E)

3

Westerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°22.865′S (at the point closest to 20°22.865′S 148°56.373′E)

4

Generally northerly along the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Dent Island (20058c) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°55.686′E (at the point closest to 20°20.217′S 148°55.686′E)

5

Northeasterly along the geodesic to the intersection of the Plum Pudding Island (20409) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°20.054′S (at the point closest to 20°20.054′S 148°56.296′E)

6

Generally easterly along the Plum Pudding Island (20409) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Plum Pudding Island (20409) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°56.362′E (at the point closest to 20°20.033′S 148°56.362′E)

7

Easterly along the geodesic to the starting point

10  Plantation Bay and Seaforth Island regular aircraft landing area

  The Plantation Bay and Seaforth Island regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Plantation Bay and Seaforth Island regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°01.817′E (at the point closest to 20°27.156′S 149°01.817′E)

2

Generally southeasterly then easterly along the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Lindeman Island (20090) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 149°03.034′E (at the point closest to 20°27.261′S 149°03.034′E)

3

South along the meridian 149°03.034′E to latitude 20°28.615′S

4

West along the parallel 20°28.615′S to longitude 149°01.817′E

5

North along the meridian 149°01.817′E to the starting point

11  Hayman, Langford and Black Islands regular aircraft landing area

  The Hayman, Langford and Black Islands regular aircraft landing area is the area bounded by the line starting at the point described in item 1 of the following table and running progressively as described in the table.

 

Hayman, Langford and Black Islands regular aircraft landing area

Item

Description

1

The intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the parallel 20°03.516′S (at the point closest to 20°03.516′S 148°52.701′E)

2

Generally easterly along the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water to the intersection of the Hayman Island (20014) coastline at mean low water and the meridian 148°53.658′E (at the point closest to 20°03.798′S 148°53.658′E)

3

Southerly along the geodesic to the intersection of the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the parallel 20°05.269′S (at the point closest to 20°05.269′S 148°53.123′E)

4

Generally northwesterly along the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge to the intersection of the LangfordBird Reef (20019) reef edge and the meridian of 148°52.375′E (at the point closest to 20°04.639′S 148°52.375′E)

5

Northerly along the geodesic to the starting point

Schedule 9—Definitions

 

Note: See subclause 1.4(1).

Act means the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Act 1975.

aircraft has the meaning given by subsection 3 (1) of the Act.

aircraft operation means a tourist program that uses an aircraft.

anchor: a vessel is anchored if:

 (a) an anchor for the vessel is dropped; or

 (b) the vessel is at anchor; or

 (c) the vessel becomes or remains stationary.

Note: This definition affects provisions that refer to a vessel being anchored or a person anchoring a vessel or that prohibit a person from anchoring a vessel. The definition affects those provisions whether they refer to the vessel using the word “vessel” or in some other way, such as a large ship, a large vessel or a superyacht.

aquaculture operation has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

Authority has the meaning given by subsection 3 (1) of the Act.

bareboat has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

bareboat operation has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

Bowen operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program that operates from Bowen; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) at any one time, uses only one primary vessel with an overall length less than 70 metres.

CAMBA has the meaning given by clause 1.11A.

conversion, from a relevant permission (the first permission) authorising conduct of a tourist program to a relevant permission (the second permission) authorising conduct of another tourist program, means the process of the Authority granting the second permission:

 (a) to take effect immediately after the first permission is surrendered or revoked; and

 (b) to remain in force for the remainder of the period that the first permission would have had if it had not been surrendered or revoked.

craftless operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) does not use a vessel or aircraft; and

 (d) may use, as part of the conduct of the operation, vessels or aircraft of other operations.

Note: For example, a craftless operation may operate from a beach or by using another vessel in ‘piggy back’ fashion to go to the reef. A dive school is an example of this type of operation.

crewed vessel operation means a tourist program that uses a crewed vessel, except a large ship.

cruise ship means a large ship that is a cruise ship (within the ordinary meaning of the phrase).

daily access means access for each day in a year.

day means a period of 24 hours commencing at midnight.

designated anchorage has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

designated motorised water sports area means an area described in Schedule 4.

each year means each calendar year.

facility means a facility for a tourist program (within the meaning given by subsection 3A (5) of the Act).

fishing or collecting has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

General Use Zone has the meaning it has in Division 2.2 of the Zoning Plan.

group size setting limits, in relation to a vessel or aircraft in a setting area, means the maximum number of people that, under Table 1, may be carried on the vessel or aircraft into the setting area.

Habitat Protection Zone has the meaning it has in Division 2.3 of the Zoning Plan.

harvest fishery has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

high-speed vessel means a personal watercraft, hovercraft or wing-in-ground-effect, or a vessel of any kind if operated faster than 35 knots.

hire craft means a motorised vessel:

 (a) that has an overall length that is not more than 6 metres; and

 (b) that is made available for timeshare, hire or charter without a master or crew.

Note: Examples of vessels that might come within the definition of hire craft include dinghies, halfcabin boats or personal watercraft.

hire equipment means a non-motorised craft—for example, a kayak, a paddleboard, or a windsurfer—that is available for timeshare, hire or charter without a master or crew.

hire operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) uses hire craft or hire equipment.

JAMBA has the meaning given by clause 1.11A.

large ship means a vessel that has an overall length of at least 70 metres.

large ship operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) at any one time uses only one large ship.

large vessel means a vessel that has an overall length of more than 35 metres, but less than 70 metres.

Location means an area described in Schedule 3 and the airspace up to 500 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

long range roving operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) uses a vessel that:

 (i) has an overall length of not more than 35 metres; and

 (ii) has been surveyed for overnight use with provision for 8 or more sleeping berths; and

 (iii) has a master and crew; and

 (d) is limited to providing a whole of vessel charter to a single client, without taking bookings from individual passengers or agents; and

 (e) is not advertised or promoted as having regular destinations, routes or timetables; and

 (f) at any one time, uses only one primary vessel.

Marine Park has the meaning given by clause 1.2.

mooring means a permanently located facility that is designed solely for mooring a vessel or aircraft, and includes the mooring buoy, tackle and point of attachment to the seabed.

motorised water sport has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

new permission means a relevant permission that does not arise out of a permission that was in existence before 18 December 2008 (which was when Schedule 1 to the Whitsundays Plan of Management Amendment 2008 (No. 1) commenced).

noanchoring area has the meaning given by the Regulations.

nonmotorised operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) uses a nonmotorised craft (even if it also uses a motorised tender less than 6 metres in overall length to provide rescue services or emergency assistance to users of the nonmotorised craft); and

 (d) uses a guide as part of the operation.

overall length has the meaning given by subsections 3 (7) and (8) of the Act.

passenger transport operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) transports passengers between a Location and a place outside the Planning Area using the most direct reasonable route; and

 (d) does not stop except:

 (i) to pick up passengers; or

 (ii) for passengers to disembark at their destination; or

 (iii) in the case of an emergency; and

 (e) at any one time, uses only one primary vessel or aircraft.

personal watercraft has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

Planning Area has the meaning given by clause 1.2.

private mooring has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

public mooring has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

reef has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

Reef 2050 Plan has the meaning given by subclause 1.5(4).

reef edge has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

regional tour operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) at any one time, uses only one primary vessel or aircraft; and

 (d) if using a vessel—uses a vessel that has an overall length of less than 70 metres; and

 (e) if using a vessel—may anchor the vessel in the Planning Area daily without a booking; and

 (f) if using an aircraft—may use the aircraft in the Planning Area daily without a booking.

regular aircraft landing area means an area described in Schedule 7.

Regulations means regulations made under the Act.

relevant permission has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

ROKAMBA has the meaning given by clause 1.11A.

setting area means an area described in Schedule 2 and the airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

setting 1 (intensive) area means an area described in Part 1 of Schedule 2 and the airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

setting 2 (high use) area means an area described in Part 2 of Schedule 2 and the airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

setting 3 (moderate use) area means an area described in Part 3 of Schedule 2 and the airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

setting 4 (low use) area means an area described in Part 4 of Schedule 2 and the airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

setting 5 (protected) area means an area described in Part 5 of Schedule 2 and the airspace up to 3,000 feet vertically above each point on the ground or water surface in that area.

ship has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

Note: The Regulations define ship for the purposes of the Zoning Plan.

Shipping Area has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

significant bird site means an area described in Schedule 6.

standard tour operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) at any one time, uses only one primary vessel or aircraft; and

 (d) if using a vessel—uses a vessel that has an overall length of less than 70 metres; and

 (e) if using a vessel—may use the vessel in the Planning Area for up to 50 days with a booking each year; and

 (f) if using an aircraft—may use the aircraft in the Planning Area for up to 50 days with a booking each year.

superyacht has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

superyacht anchorage has the same meaning as in the Regulations.

support service operation means an operation that:

 (a) is part of a tourist program; and

 (b) comprises activities permitted under one relevant permission; and

 (c) uses a vessel or aircraft to service another vessel or aircraft (the supported vessel or aircraft) to enable the supported vessel or aircraft to continue operating safely and effectively; and

 (d) does not operate in continuous association with the supported vessel or aircraft; and

 (e) does not remain associated with the supported vessel or aircraft for longer than is necessary to provide the support service; and

 (f) at any one time, uses only one primary vessel or aircraft.

Note: The following are examples of the types of services that a support service operation may offer:

(a) delivering spare parts or equipment;

(b) landing torn sails for repair;

(c) medivac support;

(d) assisting in pollution control.

taking has the same meaning as in the Zoning Plan.

tourism operation means any of the following:

 (a) a bareboat operation;

 (b) a Bowen operation;

 (c) a craftless operation;

 (e) a hire operation;

 (ea) a large ship operation;

 (f) a long range roving operation;

 (g) a non-motorised operation;

 (h) a passenger transport operation;

 (i) a regional tour operation;

 (j) a standard tour operation;

 (k) a support service operation.

tourist facility has the meaning given by subsection 3A (4) of the Act.

tourist program has the same meaning as in subsection 3A (3) of the Act, modified so that the reference to a zoning plan in that subsection is a reference to a plan of management.

Traditional Owner has the same meaning as traditional owner has in the Act.

Traditional Owner group, in relation to a site or area of the Marine Park, means the group of Traditional Owners who, in accordance with Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander custom, speak for the site or area.

transiting has the meaning given by the Regulations.

vessel has the meaning given by subsection 3 (1) of the Act.

Whitsunday Planning Area means the area:

 (a) circumscribed by the geographical coordinates in Part 1 of Schedule 1; and

 (b) depicted generally in the map in Part 2 of Schedule 1.

Zoning Plan means the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Zoning Plan 2003 as in force at the commencement of Schedule 1 to the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Amendment (Whitsundays Plan of Management) Instrument 2017.

Endnotes

Endnote 1—About the endnotes

The endnotes provide information about this compilation and the compiled law.

The following endnotes are included in every compilation:

Endnote 1—About the endnotes

Endnote 2—Abbreviation key

Endnote 3—Legislation history

Endnote 4—Amendment history

Abbreviation key—Endnote 2

The abbreviation key sets out abbreviations that may be used in the endnotes.

Legislation history and amendment history—Endnotes 3 and 4

Amending laws are annotated in the legislation history and amendment history.

The legislation history in endnote 3 provides information about each law that has amended (or will amend) the compiled law. The information includes commencement details for amending laws and details of any application, saving or transitional provisions that are not included in this compilation.

The amendment history in endnote 4 provides information about amendments at the provision (generally section or equivalent) level. It also includes information about any provision of the compiled law that has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law.

Editorial changes

The Legislation Act 2003 authorises First Parliamentary Counsel to make editorial and presentational changes to a compiled law in preparing a compilation of the law for registration. The changes must not change the effect of the law. Editorial changes take effect from the compilation registration date.

If the compilation includes editorial changes, the endnotes include a brief outline of the changes in general terms. Full details of any changes can be obtained from the Office of Parliamentary Counsel.

Misdescribed amendments

A misdescribed amendment is an amendment that does not accurately describe the amendment to be made. If, despite the misdescription, the amendment can be given effect as intended, the amendment is incorporated into the compiled law and the abbreviation “(md)” added to the details of the amendment included in the amendment history.

If a misdescribed amendment cannot be given effect as intended, the abbreviation “(md not incorp)” is added to the details of the amendment included in the amendment history.

 

Endnote 2—Abbreviation key

 

ad = added or inserted

o = order(s)

am = amended

Ord = Ordinance

amdt = amendment

orig = original

c = clause(s)

par = paragraph(s)/subparagraph(s)

C[x] = Compilation No x

    /subsubparagraph(s)

Ch = Chapter(s)

pres = present

def = definition(s)

prev = previous

Dict = Dictionary

(prev…) = previously

disallowed = disallowed by Parliament

Pt = Part(s)

Div = Division(s)

r = regulation(s)/rule(s)

ed = editorial change

reloc = relocated

exp = expires/expired or ceases/ceased to have

renum = renumbered

    effect

rep = repealed

F = Federal Register of Legislation

rs = repealed and substituted

gaz = gazette

s = section(s)/subsection(s)

LA = Legislation Act 2003

Sch = Schedule(s)

LIA = Legislative Instruments Act 2003

Sdiv = Subdivision(s)

(md) = misdescribed amendment can be given

SLI = Select Legislative Instrument

    effect

SR = Statutory Rules

(md not incorp) = misdescribed amendment

SubCh = SubChapter(s)

    cannot be given effect

SubPt = Subpart(s)

mod = modified/modification

underlining = whole or part not

No = Number(s)

    commenced or to be commenced

 

 

Endnote 3—Legislation history

 

Title

Registration

Commencement

Application, saving and transitional provisions

Whitsundays Plan of Management

22 June 1998 (Gaz 1998, No S292)

22 June 1998

 

Whitsundays Plan of Management Amendment 1999 (No 1)

12 Oct 1999 (Gaz 1999, No S481)

12 Oct 1999

Whitsundays Plan of Management Amendment 2002 (No 1)

6 June 2002 (Gaz 2002, No S179)

6 June 2002
Pt 2: 7 June 2002

Whitsundays Plan of Management Amendment 2005 (No 1)

15 Nov 2005 (F2005L03456)

16 Nov 2005

Whitsundays Plan of Management Amendment 2008 (No 1)

15 Dec 2008 (F2008L04591)

s 1–3: 16 Dec 2008
Schs 1 and 2: 18 Dec 2008 (see s. 2 (b))

Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Amendment (Whitsundays Plan of Management) Instrument 2017

19 July 2017 (F2017L00932)

Sch 1: 2 Aug 2017 (s 2(1) item 2)
Sch 2–4: 1 Jan 2018 (s 2(1) items 3–5)

Endnote 4—Amendment history

 

Provision affected

How affected

Foreword.................

am 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

Part 1

 

Part 1...................

rs 1999 No 1; 2008 No 1

Division 1

 

c 1.1....................

rs 1999 No 1; 2008 No 1

c 1.2....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

c 1.3....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.4....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

Division 2

 

Division 2................

rs F2017L00932

c 1.5....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

Division 2A

 

Division 2A...............

ad F2017L00932

Subdivision 1

 

c 1.6....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

c 1.7....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 2

 

c 1.7A...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.7B...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.7C...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.8....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 3

 

c 1.8A...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.8B...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.8C...................

ad F2017L00932

c. 1.9...................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 4

 

c 1.9A...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.9B...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.9C...................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.10...................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 5

 

c 1.10A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.10B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.10C..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.11...................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 6

 

c 1.11A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.11B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.11C..................

ad F2017L00932

Division 2B

 

Division 2B...............

ad F2017L00932

Subdivision 1

 

c 1.12...................

rs 1999 No 1; 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

c 1.13...................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 2

 

c 1.13A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.13B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.13C..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.14...................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 3

 

c 1.14A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.14B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.14C..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.15...................

rs 1999 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 4

 

c 1.15A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.15B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.15C..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.16...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Subdivision 5

 

c 1.16A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.16B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.16C..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.17...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Division 2C

 

Division 2C...............

ad F2017L00932

c 1.17A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.17B..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.17C..................

ad F2017L00932

Division 3

 

Division 3................

rs F2017L00932

c 1.18...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

c 1.19...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

c 1.20...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Division 4

 

Subdivision 1

 

c 1.21...................

ad 2008 No 1

c 1.22...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.23...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

Subdivision 2

 

c 1.24...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.24A..................

ad F2017L00932

c 1.25...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

Subdivision 3

 

c 1.26...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.27...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

c 1.28...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

Subdivision 4

 

c 1.29...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

c 1.30...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

Subdivision 5

 

c 1.31...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.32...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

ed C3

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.33...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.34...................

ad 2008 No 1

c 1.35...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.36...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.37...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.38...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

c 1.39...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.40...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 1.41...................

ad 2008 No 1

c 1.42...................

ad 2008 No 1

c 1.43...................

ad 2008 No 1

c 1.44...................

ad F2017L00932

Part 2

 

Heading to Part 2...........

rs 1999 No 1

Part 2...................

rs 1999 No 1

Note 1 to Part 2.............

rs 1999 No 1

Note 2 to Part 2.............

rs 1999 No 1; 2005 No 1; F2017L00932

Division 1

 

Heading to Div. 1 of Part 2.....

ad 1999 No 1

c 2.1....................

rs 1999 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 2.2....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.3....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

c 2.3A...................

ad 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 2.3B...................

ad F2017L00932

Division 2

 

Heading to Div. 2 of Part 2.....

ad 1999 No 1

c 2.4....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 2.5....................

rs 1999 No 1; 2002 No 1

 

am 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

c 2.5A...................

ad 2002 No 1

c 2.5B...................

ad 2002 No 1

c 2.6....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.7....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

c 2.8....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

Division 3

 

Heading to Div. 3 of Part 2.....

ad 1999 No 1

c 2.9....................

rs 1999 No 1

 

rep 2005 No 1

c 2.10...................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.11...................

ad 1999 No 1

 

am 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

c 2.12...................

ad 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1; F2017L00932

Division 4

 

Div. 4 of Part 2.............

ad 1999 No 1

Heading to c. 2.13...........

rs 2002 No 1

c 2.13...................

ad 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1

 

rs 2005 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

c 2.14...................

ad 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; F2017L00932

c 2.15...................

ad 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Div. 5 of Part 2.............

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.16...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.17...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.18...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.19...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.20...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.21...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.22...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.23...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.24...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.25...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.26...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.27...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

c 2.28...................

ad 2002 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rep 2008 No 1

Map....................

rep 2008 No 1

Schedule 1

 

Heading to Schedule 1........

rs 1999 No 1; 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 1................

am 1999 No 1

 

rs 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

am F2017L00932

Schedule 2

 

Heading to Schedule 2........

rs 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 2................

am 1999 No 1

 

rs 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

 

ed C3

Schedule 3

 

Heading to Schedule 3........

rs 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 3................

rs 2002 No 1

 

am 2005 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

Schedule 4

 

Heading to Schedule 4........

rs 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 4................

am 1999 No 1

 

rs 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

Schedule 5

 

Heading to Schedule 5........

rs 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 5................

am 1999 No 1

 

rs 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1

 

rep F2017L00932

Schedule 6

 

Schedule 6................

rs 1999 No 1

 

rep 2002 No 1

 

ad 2008 No 1

 

rs F2017L00932

Schedule 7

 

Heading to Schedule 7........

rs 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 7................

rs 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

Schedule 8

 

Schedule 8................

rs 1999 No 1; 2002 No 1; 2008 No 1

Schedule 9

 

Note to Schedule 9..........

rs 2005 No 1; F2017L00932

Schedule 9................

rs 1999 No 1

 

am 2002 No 1; 2005 No 1; 2008 No 1; F2017L00932

 

Interactions

Authorises

All Versions

Sourced from the Federal Register of Legislation at 26 August 2026. For the latest information on Australian Government law please go to https://www.legislation.gov.au.